Yamaha YSP-900 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: YSP-900

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia WH83010

YSP-900

Digital Sound Projector

Système Acoustique Numérique

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

YSP-900_E-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 11, 2006 2:46 PM

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT.

i En

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place with at least 5 cm of space above (or below) this unit –

away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture,

and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or

transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold

to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high

humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation

inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this

unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage

to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this

unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc.

in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside

this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or

personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are

complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly

causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp

the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage

the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit

with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will

not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this

unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable

disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning

storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed.

The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.

vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in

standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature

changes suddenly. Disconnect the power cable from the outlet,

then leave the unit alone.

19 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm.

Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling.

20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug

can be reached easily.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the AC wall outlet, even if this unit

itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In

this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR U.K. CUSTOMERS

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug

supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an

appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the

instructions described below. Note that the plug severed from

the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared

flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet.

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying

the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be

connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or

coloured RED. Make sure that neither core is connected to the

earth terminal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace

only with the same or equivalent type.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures

other than those specified herein may result in hazardous

radiation exposure.

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

SETUP

English

OVERVIEW ........................................................... 2

FEATURES............................................................. 3

USING THIS MANUAL........................................ 4

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ................................. 5

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 6

Front panel ................................................................. 6

Front panel display .................................................... 7

Rear panel .................................................................. 8

Remote control........................................................... 9

INSTALLATION ................................................. 11

Before installing this unit......................................... 11

Installing this unit .................................................... 11

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 14

Connecting a TV...................................................... 15

Connecting a DVD player/recorder ......................... 16

Connecting a VCR................................................... 17

Connecting a digital satellite tuner or

a cable TV tuner .................................................. 18

Connecting other external components ................... 19

Connecting a subwoofer .......................................... 20

Connecting the power supply cable......................... 21

GETTING STARTED.......................................... 22

Installing batteries in the remote control ................. 22

Operation range of the remote control..................... 22

Using the remote control ......................................... 23

Turning on the power............................................... 23

USING SET MENU.............................................. 24

Displaying the OSD................................................. 24

The flow chart of SET MENU................................. 25

CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE ........................ 26

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ............................... 27

The flow chart of AUTO SETUP ............................ 27

Installing the optimizer microphone........................ 28

Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)........................ 29

USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY .................... 34

Convenient usage of the system memory ................ 34

Saving settings......................................................... 34

Loading settings....................................................... 35

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 37

Selecting the input source........................................ 37

Playing back sources................................................ 38

Adjusting the volume............................................... 39

Muting the sound ..................................................... 39

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .................... 40

5 beam...................................................................... 40

Stereo plus 3 beam................................................... 41

3 beam...................................................................... 41

Enjoying 2-channel sources

in surround sound ................................................ 43

Enjoying TV in surround sound .............................. 44

Adjusting surround mode parameters...................... 45

ENJOYING STEREO SOUND ...........................46

Stereo playback........................................................ 46

PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY

(My beam) ..........................................................47

Using auto-adjust function....................................... 47

Using manual-adjust function.................................. 48

USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS................49

What is a sound field? ............................................. 49

Turning on CINEMA DSP programs ...................... 50

Turning off CINEMA DSP programs ..................... 51

Adjusting CINEMA DSP effect levels.................... 51

USING THE VOLUME MODE

(Night listening mode/TV volume

equal mode)........................................................52

USING BASS SOUND ENHANCER

(TruBass)............................................................54

USING THE SLEEP TIMER ..............................55

Setting the sleep timer ............................................. 55

Canceling the sleep timer ........................................ 56

MANUAL SETUP.................................................57

Using MANUAL SETUP........................................ 58

BEAM MENU ......................................................... 59

SOUND MENU....................................................... 63

INPUT MENU......................................................... 65

DISPLAY MENU.................................................... 67

ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE .............68

Using the test tone ................................................... 68

Using the audio output being played back............... 69

SELECTING THE INPUT MODE .....................71

ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS ...........72

Using the system parameters ................................... 72

Setting the MEMORY PROTECT .......................... 72

Setting the MAX VOLUME.................................... 73

Setting the TURN ON VOLUME ........................... 74

Setting the DEMO MODE ...................................... 74

Setting the FACTORY PRESET............................. 75

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................77

Setting remote control codes ................................... 77

Controlling other components ................................. 78

Using the TV macro ................................................ 80

TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................82

GLOSSARY...........................................................85

Audio formats .......................................................... 85

Audio information ................................................... 85

INDEX....................................................................86

SPECIFICATIONS...............................................87

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

SETUP

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

OVERVIEW

2 En

It is generally accepted that in order to fully enjoy the benefits of surround sound at home, you must endure the agony of

wiring and installing a great number of speakers in the hope that your listening room will give you the same kind of

surround sound experience as your local movie theater.

YAMAHA YSP-900 Digital Sound Projector challenges this preconception that complicated speaker setup and

troublesome wiring go hand-in-hand with the enjoyment of multi-channel surround sound.

This slimline unit does away with the need for complicated wiring and installation worries, leaving you with a unit that is

not only easy to set up, but which is also capable of reproducing the kind of powerful surround sound you have been

waiting for from its built-in 2 woofers and 21 full-range small speakers.

You can fine-tune the parameters of this unit to adjust the delay time for separate sound beams, resulting in highly

directional sound that comes in on the listening position from all directions.

The YSP-900 projects sound beams containing surround sound information for the front right (R), front left (L), surround

right (SR) and surround left (SL) speaker positions, which are reflected off the walls of your listening room before

reaching the actual listening position. With the addition of center (C) sound beams, this Digital Sound Projector creates

true-to-life 5.1 channel surround sound that makes you feel as if there are actual speakers around the room.

Sit back and enjoy the real sound experience of this simple, yet stylish Digital Sound Projector.

OVERVIEW

Listening position

Imaginary

surround left

speaker

Imaginary

surround right

speaker

Imaginary

front left

speaker

Imaginary

front right

speaker

Imaginary

center

speaker

FEATURES

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Digital Sound Projector

This unit employs the digital sound projector technology

that allows one slim unit to control and steer multiple

channels of sound to generate multi channel surround

sound, thus eliminating the need for satellite loudspeakers

and cabling normally associated with conventional

surround sound systems. This unit is also equipped with

the following beam modes so that you can enjoy the

surround sound.

◆ 5 beam

◆ Stereo plus 3 beam

◆ 3 beam

This unit also employs the stereo playback and my beam.

My beam

This unit employs the my beam so that you can achieve a

clear sound in noisy environment. You can adjust the

beam angle manually or automatically using the supplied

remote control.

Cinema DSP Digital

This unit employs the Cinema DSP Digital technology

developed by YAMAHA Electronics Corp. so that you can

experience movies at home with all the dramatic sound

impact that the director intended to convey.

Versatile Remote Control

The supplied remote control come with preset remote

control codes to be used to control the DVD player, VCR,

cable TV tuner and digital satellite tuner connected to this

unit. In addition, the remote control is equipped with the

macro capability so that you can perform a series of

operations with the press of a single button.

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic

optimization technology with the aid of the supplied

optimizer microphone so that you can avoid troublesome

listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate

sound beam adjustments that best match your listening

environment.

Compatibility with the Newest Technologies

This unit employs decoders compatible with Dolby

Digital, DTS (Digital Theater Systems), Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Pro Logic II and DTS Neo:6.

◆ Dolby Digital

This is the standard audio signal format used on DVDs and

other purely digital media. This surround technology deliver

high-quality digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to

produce a directional and more realistic effect.

◆ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

This is an audio signal format used on DVDs and other purely

digital media. This surround technology deliver high-quality

digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a

directional and more realistic effect.

◆ Dolby Pro Logic

This sophisticated, matrix decoding technology up-converts

any 2 channel source audio to a 5.1 channel full bandwidth

playback, resulting in a surround sound experience.

◆ Dolby Pro Logic II

This is fundamentally a redesigned version of Dolby Pro

Logic that employs 2 stereo surround channels, a subwoofer

and a greatly enhanced steering logic. As a result, this

improved technology provides an exceptionally stable sound

field that simulates 5.1 to a much greater degree than the

original Dolby Pro Logic. In addition, Dolby Pro Logic II

features Movie, Music and Game modes specifically designed

for movies, music and games respectively.

◆ DTS Neo:6

This technology decodes the conventional 2 channel sources

for 6 channel playback, enabling playback with the full-range

channels with higher separation. Music mode and Cinema

mode are available to play back music and movie sources

respectively.

The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of

YAMAHA Corporation.

The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered

trademarks of YAMAHA Corporation.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS” and “Neo:6” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,

Inc.

Manufactured under license from 1 Ltd. Worldwide patents

applied for.

The “ ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector

™

” are trademarks

of 1 Ltd.

TruBass, SRS and the “ ” symbol are registered trademarks

of SRS Labs, Inc. TruBass technology is incorporated under

license from SRS Labs, Inc.

FEATURES

USING THIS MANUAL

4 En

• This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the

supplied owner’s manual for the component.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In such cases, the operation is

described using remote control operation.

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

1 Install this unit in your listening room.

See “INSTALLATION” on page 11.

2 Connect this unit to your TV and other external components.

See “CONNECTIONS” on page 14.

3 Prepare the remote control and turn on the power of this unit.

See “GETTING STARTED” on page 22.

4 Run AUTO SETUP.

See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 27.

5 Play back a source.

See “PLAYBACK” on page 37.

6 Change the beam modes and/or CINEMA DSP settings.

See “ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND” on page 40.

7 Run MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune settings and/or set remote control codes.

See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 57 and “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 77.

USING THIS MANUAL

Notes

If you want to make additional settings

and adjustments

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Check that you have received all of the following parts.

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

POWER

STANDBY/ON

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

Remote control (×1)

Batteries (×2)

(AA, R6, UM-3)

OSD video pin cable (×1)

Optimizer microphone (×1)

Fasteners (×4)

Audio pin cable (×1)

Digital audio pin cable (×1)

Optical cable (×1)

Cable clamp (×1)

Cardboard microphone

stand (×1)

(Orange)

(White/Red)

(Yellow)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

6 En

1 OPTIMIZER MIC jack

Use to connect the supplied optimizer microphone to be

used to run AUTO SETUP (see page 28).

2 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

3 Remote control sensor

Receives infrared signals from the remote control.

4 INPUT

Press repeatedly to switch between input sources (TV,

STB, VCR, DVD or AUX). See page 37 for details.

Outputs a test tone to experience the sound beam (see

page 68).

5 VOLUME –/+

Controls the volume level of all audio channels (see

page 39).

6 STANDBY/ON

Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 23).

• When you turn on the power of this unit, you will hear a click

and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before it can reproduce

sound.

• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote

control.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

1 2 3

4 5 6

STANDBY/ONVOLUME

INPUT

Notes

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 NIGHT indicator

Lights up when one of the night listening modes is

selected (see page 52).

2 SLEEP indicator

Lights up when the sleep timer is turned on (see page 55).

3 Decoder indicators

Light up when the corresponding decoder of this unit is in

operation (see page 42).

4 Volume level indicator

Shows the current volume level (see page 39).

5 Multi-information display

Shows information when you adjust the parameters of this

unit.

You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display using the

DISPLAY MENU parameters in MANUAL SETUP (see

page 67).

Front panel display

NIGHT SLEEP PCM PL

VOLDIGITAL

412 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

8 En

1 VCR analog audio input jacks

Use to make an analog connection to your VCR

(see page 17).

2 TV/STB analog audio input jacks

Use to make an analog connection to your TV, digital

satellite tuner and cable TV tuner (see pages 15 and 18).

3 SUBWOOFER OUT jack

Use to connect a subwoofer (see page 20).

4 VIDEO OUT jack

Use to connect to the video input terminal of your TV to

display the OSD of this unit (see page 15).

5 TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack

Use to connect a TV, digital satellite tuner and cable TV

tuner via an optical digital connection (see pages 15 and

18).

6 AUX OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack

Use to connect an external component via an optical

digital connection (see page 19).

7 DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack

Use to connect a DVD player via a coaxial digital

connection (see page 16).

8 AC power supply cable

Use to connect to the AC wall outlet (see page 21).

Rear panel

1234 5 6 7

VCR

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB VIDEO

AUX

DVD

COAXIAL

(Europe model)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

9 En

INTRODUCTION

English

The functions of some buttons change depending on the

position of the operation mode selector (S). This section

basically describes the functions of the remote control

used to control this unit.

You can also control other components using the remote control

once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See

“Controlling other components” on page 78 for details.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 STANDBY/ON

Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 23).

3 Transmission indicator

Lights up when infrared control signals are being output.

4 Input selector buttons

Use to select an input source (STB, VCR, DVD, AUX or

TV).

Use to change the control area of the remote control.

(S: TV/AV)

5 VOL MODE

Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 52).

6 AUTO SETUP

Use to enter the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 27).

7 Numeric buttons

Use to enter numbers. (S: TV/AV)

8 STEREO

Use the playback sources in 2-channel stereo (see

page 46).

9 Sound field program buttons

Use to select sound field programs (see page 49).

0 CH LEVEL

Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 69).

A Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

Use to select and adjust SET MENU items.

Use to select DVD menu items. (S: TV/AV)

B TEST

Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each

speaker (see page 68).

C VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see

page 39).

D MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level (see page 39).

E TV INPUT

Switches the input source or the TV (see page 78).

F DVD player/VCR control buttons

Use to control the DVD player or the VCR (see pages 78

and 79).

G My beam microphone

Use to collect the test tones from this unit when using the

my beam auto-adjust function (see page 48).

Remote control

POWER

STANDBY/ON

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

10 En

H TV POWER

Turns on the power of the TV or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 78).

I AV POWER

Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to

the standby mode (see pages 78 and 79).

J INPUT1/INPUT2

Selects the input source of the TV (see page 78).

K MACRO

Use to set the TV macro (see page 80).

L SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer (see page 55).

M INPUTMODE

Switches between input modes (AUTO, DTS or

ANALOG). See page 71 for details.

N Beam mode buttons

Change the beam mode settings (see pages 40, 46 and 47).

O SURROUND

Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 40).

P MY BEAM

Use to select the my beam as the beam mode (see

page 48).

Q TruBass

Use to effectively reproduce the bass sound (see page 54).

R MENU

Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see

pages 29 and 58).

Displays the DVD menu. (S: TV/AV)

S Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when

operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating the

TV or other AV components set up the appropriate remote

control codes.

T RETURN

Use to select sleep timer settings or return to the previous

SET MENU screen.

Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit the

DVD menu. (S: TV/AV)

U TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the volume level of the TV (see page 78).

V CH +/–

Switches between channels of the TV or the VCR (see

pages 78 and 79).

W TV MUTE, CODE SET

Mutes the audio output of the TV (see page 78).

Use to set up remote control codes (see page 77).

INSTALLATION

11 En

PREPARATION

English

This section describes a suitable installation location to install the unit using a metal wall bracket, a rack or a stand.

This unit creates surround sound by reflecting projected

sound beams off the walls of your listening room. The

surround sound effects produced by this unit may not be

sufficient when the unit is installed in the following

locations.

• Rooms with surfaces inadequate for reflecting sound

beams

• Rooms with acoustically absorbent surfaces

• Rooms with measurements outside the following range

W (3 to 7 m) x H (2 to 3.5 m) x D (3 to 7 m)

• Rooms with less than 1.8 m from the listening position

to the speaker positions

• Rooms where objects such as furniture are likely to

obstruct the path of sound beams

• Rooms where the listening position is close to the walls

• Rooms where the listening position is not in front of

this unit

Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation

space so that heat can escape. Make at least 5 cm of space

above or below this unit.

• We do not recommend installing this unit so that it is positioned

directly on the floor of your listening room. Please install this

unit using a metal wall bracket, rack or stand.

• This unit weighs 9.0 kg. Be sure to install this unit where it will

not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an earthquake, and

where it is out of the reach of children.

• When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this

unit directly above your TV.

• This unit is shielded against magnetic rays. However, if the

picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we

recommend moving the speakers away from your TV.

Install this unit where there are no obstacles such as

furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise,

the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved.

You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the

corner.

Parallel installation

Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is

measured from the left and right corners.

Corner installation

Install this unit in the corner at a 40º to 50º angle from the

adjacent walls.

INSTALLATION

Before installing this unit

Notes

5 cm or more

Rear

Front

Side view

Installing this unit

An object, such as furniture

40° to 50°

An object, such as furniture

12 En

INSTALLATION

■ Installation examples

Example 1

Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible.

Example 2

Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls.

Example 3

Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position.

13 En

INSTALLATION

PREPARATION

English

■ Using a metal wall bracket

You can use the optional metal wall bracket to mount this

unit on the wall in your listening room.

Refer to the instructions supplied with the metal bracket for

details on how to attach the metal bracket to the wall or how to

attach this unit to the metal bracket.

■ Using a stand

You can mount your TV on the stand placed on a

commercially available rack to install this unit under your

TV.

Refer to the instructions supplied with the stand for details on

how to install the stand or how to mount this unit and the TV on

the stand.

■ Using a rack

You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a

commercially available rack.

Make sure that the rack is large enough to allow adequate

ventilation space around this unit (see page 11) and that it is

strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV.

■ Affixing this unit

Peel off the film from each of the four supplied fasteners

and then secure them to the bottom four corners of this

unit and the top of the rack, etc.

• Do not install this unit on top of a slanted surface. This unit may

fall over and cause injury.

• Make sure you wipe the surface of the rack, etc. before securing

the fasteners. Applying the tape to a dirty or wet surface will

weaken the sticking power of the tape, and this unit may fall as

a result.

This unit

Metal wall bracket

This unit

Stand

Note

Notes

When this unit is installed above your TV

When this unit is installed under your TV

This unit

Peel off

the film

Fasteners

CONNECTIONS

14 En

This unit is equipped with two optical digital jacks, one coaxial digital jack and two types of analog jacks for connecting

external components such as your TV, DVD player, VCR, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner and game console.

Further, by connecting a subwoofer to this unit, you can enjoy reinforced low bass sounds. For details on how to connect

various types of external components to this unit, see pages 15 to 20.

• Do not connect this unit or other components to the main power until all connections between components are

complete.

• Unplug the power supply cable before changing connections, moving or cleaning this unit.

CONNECTIONS

CAUTION

This unit

Audio connection

Video connection

Digital satellite tuner, cable TV

tuner or game console

DVD player Subwoofer VCR

Optical fiber cable

To prevent cables from becoming unplugged, place the supplied

cable clamp with the open side facing upward, attach it to the rear

panel of this unit in a suitable position and then affix cables in the

cable clamp.

Attach to this unit

15 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

You can connect a TV to this unit and display the OSD for easy viewing when you adjust the system parameters in SET

MENU.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 14).

If you connect this unit to the analog audio and optical digital audio output jacks at the same time as shown in the left illustration below,

the digital audio signals output at the optical digital output jack take priority over the analog audio signals output at the analog audio

output jacks.

■ Digital and analog audio connections

Cables used for connections

■ Video connections

Cables used for connections

Connecting a TV

Note

VCR

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB VIDEO

AUX

DVD

COAXIAL

Rear panel of this unit

Analog audio

output

Optical digital

output

Remove the caps if

attached

Check the direction

Optical cable (supplied)

Audio pin cable

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

VCR

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB VIDEO

AUX

DVD

COAXIAL

Video

input

Rear panel of this unit

OSD video pin cable (supplied)

(Yellow)(Yellow)

16 En

CONNECTIONS

To connect a DVD player/recorder, connect the coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player to the coaxial digital

input jack (DVD COAXIAL) on this unit.

If there is no coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player/recorder, use them with optical digital connection.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 14).

• Check that your DVD player/recorder is properly set to output Dolby Digital and DTS digital audio signals. If not, adjust the system

settings of your DVD player/recorder. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your DVD player/recorder.

• If your DVD player/recorder does not have a coaxial digital output jack, make an optical digital audio connection instead.

Cables used for connections

Connecting a DVD player/recorder

Notes

VCR

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB VIDEO

AUX

DVD

COAXIAL

Rear panel of this unit

Video signal to a TV

Coaxial digital

output

Analog audio

output

Coaxial digital

output

DVD/VCR combo

player/recorder

DVD player/recorder

Video signal to a TV

Audio pin cable

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

Digital audio pin cable (supplied)

(Orange)(Orange)

17 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

To connect a VCR, connect the analog audio output jacks on your VCR to the analog audio input jacks (VCR R/L) on

this unit.

Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

Cables used for connections

Connecting a VCR

VCR

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB VIDEO

AUX

DVD

COAXIAL

Video signal to a TV

Rear panel of this unit

Analog audio

output

VCR

Audio pin cable

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

18 En

CONNECTIONS

To connect a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner, connect the optical digital output jack on your digital satellite

tuner or cable TV tuner to the optical digital input jack (TV/STB OPTICAL) on this unit. In addition, connect the analog

audio output jacks on your VCR to the analog audio input jacks (TV/STB R/L) on this unit.

Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 14).

If your TV and tuner connected to this unit do not support digital broadcasting, connect the analog audio output jacks (TV/STB R/L) on

this unit to the analog audio output jacks on your TV.

Cables used for connections

Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner

Note

VCR

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB VIDEO

AUX

DVD

COAXIAL

Video signal to a TV

Rear panel of this unit

Digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner

Optical digital

output

Analog audio

output

Analog audio

output

Optical cable (supplied)

Audio pin cable

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

19 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

To connect other external components, connect the optical digital output jack on the component to the optical digital

input jack (AUX OPTICAL) on this unit.

You can connect a DVD player/recorder or a component that supports optical digital connections.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 14).

Cables used for connections

Connecting other external components

VCR

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB VIDEO

AUX

DVD

COAXIAL

Optical digital

output

Video signal to a TV

Game console, etc.

Rear panel of this unit

Optical cable (supplied)

20 En

CONNECTIONS

To connect a subwoofer, connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the monaural audio output jack

(SUBWOOFER OUT) on this unit.

No sound will be output from a subwoofer when only this connection has been made. To output sounds from a

subwoofer, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then run AUTO SETUP (see page 27) or select SWFR for BASS

OUT in SUBWOOFER SET (see page 63).

Cables used for connections

Connecting a subwoofer

VCR

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB VIDEO

AUX

DVD

COAXIAL

Monaural

input

Subwoofer

Rear panel of this unit

Subwoofer pin cable

21 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

Once all other connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC wall outlet.

Connecting the power supply cable

To the AC outlet

GETTING STARTED

22 En

1 Press and hold the mark on the battery

cover and then slide off the cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6,

UM-3) into the battery compartment.

Make sure you insert the batteries according to the

polarity markings (+/–).

3 Close the battery cover.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions; the operation range of the remote control decreases,

the indicator does not blink or its light becomes dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• Exhausted batteries may leak. If the batteries have leaked,

dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked

material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean

the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new

batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste. Dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• The contents of the memory stored in the remote control may be

erased in the following cases:

– The remote control is left without batteries for more than 2

minutes.

– Exhausted batteries remain in the remote control.

– The buttons on the remote control are accidentally pressed

when you change batteries.

• If the memory stored in the remote control is unwantedly

erased, insert new batteries and reset the remote control codes

again.

Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote

control.

You can control other components by setting the appropriate

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Use the remote control within 6 m of this unit and point it

toward the remote control sensor on this unit during

operation.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types

of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or a stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• Do not expose the remote control sensor on this unit to direct

sunlight or lighting such as inverted fluorescent lamps.

• If the batteries grow old, the effective operation distance of the

remote control decreases considerably. If this happens, replace

the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible.

GETTING STARTED

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Notes

Press

Operation range of the remote

control

Notes

Approximately

6 m

GETTING STARTED

23 En

SETUP

English

This section describes how to control this unit using the

supplied remote control. The functions of the remote

control change depending on the position of the operation

mode selector. Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit. The buttons on

the remote control numbered 1 to 4 are operational only

when you select YSP. Also, functions of the buttons

numbered 5 to 9 vary depending on the position of the

operation mode selector. The corresponding functions of

the buttons, see page 9.

You can control other components by setting the appropriate

remote control codes (see page 77). Once the remote control code

for each input source (DVD, VCR, STB, TV or AUX) is set, see

“Controlling other components” on page 78 for further

information on the specific functions of the available remote

control buttons for each input source.

1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on

the remote control to turn on the power of

this unit.

The volume level appears in the front panel display

and then the input source and beam mode currently

selected are displayed.

2 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on

the remote control again to set this unit to

the standby mode.

When the unit is in the standby mode, only STANDBY/ON on the

front panel or on the remote control is operational, and the other

control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control are not

operational until the power of this unit is turned on.

Using the remote control

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

Operational buttons only when YSP is

selected

Function-varying buttons

Turning on the power

Note

STANDBY/ONVOLUME

POWER

STANDBY/ON

INPUT2

MACROINPUT1

AUX

STB VCR DVD

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

USING SET MENU

24 En

This section simply describes how to display the OSD (on-screen display) of this unit on your TV screen and set the

parameters for your listening room. Once this is complete, you can enjoy real surround sound while watching TV in the

comfort of your own home.

1 Check that the video input jack on your TV is

connected to the VIDEO OUT jack of this unit

to display the OSD of this unit.

2 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on

the remote control to turn on the power of

this unit.

3 Turn on the power of your TV.

The following screen appears on your TV.

If the OSD does not appear, use the remote control

provided with your TV to switch the video input until

the OSD appears.

USING SET MENU

Displaying the OSD

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

Push [MENU] to begin set-up

YSP-900

OSD screen example

USING SET MENU

25 En

SETUP

English

The following diagram illustrates the overall flow of the setup procedure.

The flow chart of SET MENU

Run AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).

See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 27.

Look for a remedy.

See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 33 for a complete list of error

messages and possible remedies.

Play back audio signals or adjust the settings for the beam mode and the CINEMA DSP.

See “PLAYBACK” on page 37.

Run MANUAL SETUP.

See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 57.

• If you cannot clearly hear a sound beam from a specific channel, adjust settings for

SETTING PARAMETERS (see page 59) or for BEAM ADJUSTMENT (see page 60) in

BEAM MENU.

• If there are acoustically absorbent objects such as curtains in the path of the sound beams,

adjust settings for TREBLE GAIN in BEAM MENU (see page 62).

If an error occurs

If you want to make additional settings

and adjustments

Run LANGUAGE SETUP.

See “CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE” on page 26.

CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE

26 En

This feature allows you to select the language of your choice that appears in the SET MENU of this unit.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press MENU on the remote control.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed on

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN on the remote control.

• To cancel the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select LANGUAGE SETUP

and then press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select the language and

then press ENTER.

Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German),

Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish)

CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

Francais

ESPANOL

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

LANGUAGE SETUP

ENTER

AUTO SETUP (INTELLIBEAM)

27 En

SETUP

English

This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams on the walls of your listening room and broadening the

cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the

beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit.

This unit employs the beam optimization and sound optimization features with the aid of the supplied optimizer

microphone, allowing you to avoid troublesome listening-based setup and achieving highly accurate sound adjustments

that best match your listening environment. We call these 2 features “IntelliBeam” generically.

The beam optimization creates the best possible surround sound field without manually setting the parameters for your

listening room.

The sound optimization feature performs the following checks and automatically makes appropriate sound adjustments.

DISTANCE:

Checks the distance of each beam from this unit and adjusts the delay of each channel so that each sound beam reaches

the listening position at the same time.

EQUALIZING:

Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a

cohesive sound field. The sound optimization feature incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for

each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency

characteristics.

LEVEL:

Checks and adjusts the sound output level of each channel.

This unit performs a series of checks to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume and quality. You can choose to optimize

all or part of the parameters.

The beam angle checking procedure is skipped if SOUND

OPTIMZ only is selected.

The sound optimization procedure is skipped if BEAM

OPTIMZ only is selected.

The subwoofer checking procedure is skipped if BEAM

OPTIMZ only is selected.

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

The flow chart of AUTO SETUP

*2 *3

Checking the environment of

your listening room

Optimizing the beam angle

Checking the subwoofer

Optimizing the beam delay,

frequency and volume

Beam

optimization

Sound

optimization

Notes

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

28 En

The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound that this unit produces in your actual listening

environment. Follow the procedure below to connect the optimizer microphone to this unit and make sure that the

optimizer microphone is placed in a proper location and that there are no large obstacles between the optimizer

microphone and the walls in your listening room.

• After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone.

• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.

– Keep it away from direct sunlight.

– Do not place it on top of this unit.

• Do not connect the optimizer microphone to an extension cable as doing so may result in an inaccurate sound optimization.

• An error may occur during the AUTO SETUP procedure if the optimizer microphone is not properly placed in your listening room. To

avoid the possibility of an error:

– Do not place the optimizer microphone to the extreme right or left from the center of this unit.

– Do not place the optimizer microphone within 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit.

– Do not place the optimizer microphone more than 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit.

• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the optimizer microphone and the walls in your listening room as these objects obstruct

the path of sound beams. However, any objects that are in contact with the walls will be regarded as a protruding part of the walls.

• The best possible results are achieved if the optimizer microphone is placed at the same height as your ears would be when you are

seated in your listening position. However, if this is not possible, you can manually fine-tune the sound beam angle and balance the

sound beam output levels using MANUAL SETUP (see page 57) once the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed.

• If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover/high cut frequency controls is connected to this unit, set the volume between 10

and 12 o’clock as viewed on a conventional clockface and set the crossover/high cut frequency to the maximum.

1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on

the remote control to turn off the power of

this unit.

2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

3 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat

level surface more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the

front of the unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper

or lower from the center height of the unit

with the optimizer microphone head upward

at your normal listening position.

Be sure to place the optimizer microphone on an imaginary

center line drawn from this unit.

You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand

to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your

ears would be when you are seated in your listening position.

Installing the optimizer microphone

Notes

VOLUME

MIN

MAX

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

Subwoofer

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

OPTIMIZER MIC

Note

Optimizer

microphone

More than

1.8 m (6.0 ft)

Within 1 m (3.3 ft)

upper or lower

from the center

Cardboard

microphone stand

Sofa

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

29 En

SETUP

English

■ Assembling the supplied cardboard

microphone stand

You will find three separate parts (one circular-shaped part

and two longitudinal-shaped parts) of the cardboard

microphone stand originally put together.

1 Disassemble the three parts of the cardboard

microphone stand originally put together.

2 Insert one of the longitudinal-shaped part

into the crevice of the other longitudinal-

shaped part.

3 Place the circular-shaped part on top of the

two combined longitudinal-shaped parts.

4 Place the supplied optimizer microphone on

top of the circular-shaped part.

Once the optimizer microphone is firmly connected to this

unit and properly placed in your listening room, follow the

procedure below to start the AUTO SETUP procedure.

You can also enter the AUTO SETUP procedure simply by

pressing and holding AUTO SETUP on the remote control

for more than 2 seconds. In this case, this unit performs

both of the beam optimization and sound optimization

procedures.

Optimizer

microphone

Center line

Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

POWER

STANDBY/ON

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

STANDBY/ONVOLUME

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

30 En

• Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible while

this unit is performing the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself from

your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is

completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound

beams.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure may not be run successfully if

this unit is installed in one of the rooms described in “Before

installing this unit” on page 11. In such cases, run MANUAL

SETUP (see page 57) to manually adjust the corresponding

parameters.

• If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played, the AUTO SETUP

procedure stops and then an error message appears on the

screen. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 33 for

appropriate remedies.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes maximum.

A chime is played when the AUTO SETUP procedure is run

successfully.

• If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend

following the procedure below.

1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection.

2. Run BEAM OPTIMZ only.

3. Close the curtains.

4. Run SOUND OPTIMZ only.

• You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP

procedure (see page 34). A set of settings optimized according

to specific conditions of your listening environment can be

recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your

listening environment (see page 35).

1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on

the remote control to turn on the power of

this unit.

If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the

power of the subwoofer.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

3 Press MENU on the remote control.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed on

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN on the remote control.

• To cancel the SET MENU screen, press MENU again.

• You can start the BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ procedure

simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP on the

remote control for more than 2 seconds. Step 4 and 5 are

skipped and then the screen shown in step 5 is displayed

on your TV. Start the AUTO SETUP procedure from

step 6.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

4 Press / on the remote control to select

AUTO SETUP and then press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

Notes

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ

2)BEAM OPTIMZ only

3)SOUND OPTIMZ only

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

31 En

SETUP

English

5 Press / to select BEAM+SOUND

OPTIMZ, BEAM OPTIMZ only or SOUND

OPTIMZ only and then press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ

(Beam optimization and sound optimization)

Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume and quality

so that the parameters best match your listening

environment.

It is recommended that you should select this optimization

feature in the following cases:

• If you make settings for the first time.

• If the unit has been relocated.

• If your listening room has been restructured.

• If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.)

have been rearranged.

This menu takes about 3 minutes.

BEAM OPTIMZ only

(Beam optimization only)

Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best

matches your listening environment.

This menu takes about 1 minute.

SOUND OPTIMZ only

(Sound optimization only)

Use to optimize the beam delay, volume and quality so

that the parameters best match your listening environment.

It is recommended that you should select this optimization

feature in the following cases:

• If you have opened or closed the curtains in your

listening room before using this unit.

• If you have manually set the beam angle.

This menu takes about 2 minutes.

You must optimize the beam angle in the BEAM OPTIMZ only

procedure before starting the SOUND OPTIMZ only procedure.

6 Check the following points once again before

starting the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• Is the optimizer microphone firmly connected to

this unit?

• Is the optimizer microphone placed in a proper

location?

• Are there any large obstacles in between the

optimizer microphone and the walls in your

listening room?

7 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP

procedure.

The following screen appears on your TV and the

AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds.

Evacuate yourself from your listening room before

starting the AUTO SETUP procedure.

If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and an

error message is displayed. See “Error messages for

AUTO SETUP” on page 33 for a complete list of

error messages and their proper remedies. Follow the

instructions and perform the AUTO SETUP

procedure again.

Note

ENTER

PREPARATION & CHECK

Please connect the MIC.

Please place the MIC at least

1.8m/6ft away from the YSP

unit. The MIC should be set

at ear level when seated.

Measurement takes about 3min.

After [ENTER] is pressed,

please leave the room.

[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP

WILL BEGIN in 10SEC

Please leave the room.

**--------

[RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP START

ENTER

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

32 En

8 Check that the following screen is displayed

on your TV.

The results of the AUTO SETUP procedure are

displayed on your TV.

• If ‘‘ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]’’ is

displayed, we recommend running the AUTO SETUP

procedure again. For details, see step 9.

• If ‘‘SUB WOOFER: NOT APPLICABLE’’ is

displayed even though a subwoofer is connected to this

unit, increase the volume level of the subwoofer and

run the AUTO SETUP procedure again.

• Depending on the environment of your listening room,

the beam angle of front left and right, and surround left

and right may be set to the same value even if 5BEAM

is displayed as a result.

9 Press ENTER to confirm the results or press

RETURN to cancel the results.

The following screen is displayed temporarily for 2

seconds and then disappears from your TV.

If ‘‘ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]’’ is displayed

in step 8, the following screen is displayed after pressing

ENTER. In this case, see ERROR E-1 in “Error messages

for AUTO SETUP” on page 33. Press ENTER to exit the

AUTO SETUP and then run the procedure again from

step 3.

10 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from

the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUB WOOFER:NOT APPLICABLE

[ENTER]:Save set-up.

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.

SHOW RESULT

Example 1

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

ENVIRONMENT CHECK[FAILED]

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUB WOOFER:YES

[ENTER]:Save set-up.

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.

SHOW RESULT

Example 2

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Please remove the MIC from

the YSP and the listening

position.

ENTER

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Your YSP unit may not be set

up correctly.

We recommend you try again.

Please press [ENTER] key to

exit.

OPTIMIZER MIC

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

33 En

SETUP

English

■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP

Before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts

While the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress

If one of the errors shown below except E-1 is displayed, press RETURN. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP

procedure by pressing AUTO SETUP on the remote control in step 3, run the procedure again from step 3 after once the

screen disappears. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing MENU on the remote control in

step 3, run the procedure again from step 4 after the screen in step 3 is displayed. Run the MANUAL SETUP if the

problem is difficult to be saved.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

ERROR E-2

No MIC Detected. Please check

MIC connection and re-try.

The optimizer microphone is not

connected to this unit.

Connect the optimizer microphone to

this unit.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

ERROR E-1

Please test in quieter environment.

There is too much unwanted noise in

your listening room.

Make sure that your listening room is as

quiet as possible. You may want to

choose certain hours during the day

when there is not much noise coming

from outside.

—

ERROR E-2

No MIC detected. Please check

MIC connection and re-try.

The optimizer microphone was

disconnected while the AUTO SETUP

procedure was in progress.

Make sure that the optimizer microphone

is firmly connected to this unit.

ERROR E-3

Unexpected control is detected.

Please re-try.

Some other operations were performed

on this unit while the AUTO SETUP

procedure was in progress.

Do not perform any other operations

while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in

progress.

—

ERROR E-4

Please check MIC position. MIC

should be set in front of YSP.

The optimizer microphone is not placed

in front of this unit.

Make sure that the optimizer microphone

is installed in front of this unit.

ERROR E-5

Please check MIC position. MIC

should be set above 1.8m/6ft.

The optimizer microphone is not placed

in the right distance from this unit.

Make sure that the optimizer microphone

is installed more than 1.8 m from the

front of this unit and within 1 m from the

center height of this unit.

ERROR E-6

Volume level is lower than

expected. Please check MIC

position/connection and re-try.

The optimizer microphone cannot collect

the sound produced by this unit because

the sound output level is too low.

Make sure that the optimizer microphone

is firmly connected to this unit and

placed in a proper location. If the

problem persists, contact the nearest

YAMAHA service center for assistance.

ERROR E-7

Unexpected error happened.

Please re-try.

An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure.

—

USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY

34 En

You can save the current settings adjusted in SET MENU

in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save

certain settings according to the varying conditions of

your listening environment. For example, if there are

curtains in the path of beams, the effectiveness of the

beams will vary depending on whether the curtains are

open or closed.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press MENU on the remote control.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed on

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN on the remote control.

• To cancel the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MEMORY and then

press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select SAVE and then press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY

Convenient usage of the system

memory

Saving settings

When the curtains are

open

When the curtains are

closed

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)LOAD

2)SAVE

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MEMORY

ENTER

MEMORY1

MEMORY2

MEMORY3

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

1)MEMORY SAVE

USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY

35 En

SETUP

English

5 Press / to select MEMORY1,

MEMORY2 or MEMORY3 and then press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

6 Press ENTER again.

The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1,

MEMORY2 or MEMORY3. Once the parameters are

saved, the display returns to the SET MENU screen.

7 Press MENU to exit.

The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV.

You can recall the settings saved in “Saving settings” on

page 34 according to the varying conditions of your

listening environment.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press MENU on the remote control.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed on

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN on the remote control.

• To cancel the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MEMORY and then

press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

ENTER

MEMORY1 Save Now ?

Push [ENTER] to Save

2)MEMORY SAVE

MEMORY1 Saving

2)MEMORY SAVE

ENTER

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

Loading settings

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)LOAD

2)SAVE

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MEMORY

USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY

36 En

4 Press / to select LOAD and then press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

5 Press / to select MEMORY1,

MEMORY2 or MEMORY3 and then press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

6 Press ENTER again.

The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1,

MEMORY2 or MEMORY3. Once the parameters are

saved, the display returns to the SET MENU screen.

7 Press MENU to exit.

The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV.

ENTER

MEMORY1

MEMORY2

MEMORY3

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

1)MEMORY LOAD

ENTER

MEMORY1 Load Now ?

Push [ENTER] to Load

1)MEMORY LOAD

MEMORY1 Loading

1)MEMORY LOAD

ENTER

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

PLAYBACK

37 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can play back sound from the components connected

to this unit simply by pressing INPUT on the front panel

repeatedly or pressing one of the input selector buttons

(TV, STB, VCR, DVD or AUX) on the remote control.

The name of the selected input source and the type of the

corresponding input mode appear in the front panel

display.

■ Front panel operations

Press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

toggle between TV, DVD, VCR and AUX.

The name of the corresponding input source and the type

of the current input mode are shown in the front panel

display.

■ Remote control operations

Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch

to the operation mode of this unit and then press

TV on the remote control to play back a TV

program.

Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch

to the operation mode of this unit and then press

STB on the remote control to play back a satellite

broadcast.

Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch

to the operation mode of this unit and then press

DVD on the remote control to play back a DVD.

PLAYBACK

Selecting the input source

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

STANDBY/ONVOLUME

INPUT

VOL

Name of the selected

input source

Type of the selected

input mode

YSP

TV/AV

STB

VOL

YSP

TV/AV

DVD

VOL

YSP

TV/AV

38 En

PLAYBACK

Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch

to the operation mode of this unit and then press

VCR on the remote control to play back a video

tape.

Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch

to the operation mode of this unit and then press

AUX on the remote control to play back a

component connected to the AUX jack on the

rear panel of this unit.

Once an input source is selected (see page 37), you can

play back the selected input source.

This section uses a DVD player as an example of the playback

source.

For details on the TV and the DVD player you are using, refer to

the owner’s manual supplied with the TV and the DVD player.

1 Turn on the power of your DVD player using

the remote control supplied with the DVD

player.

2 Switch to the video input on your TV using

the remote control supplied with the TV so

that the DVD menu screen is displayed.

3 If necessary, turn down the volume of your

TV until you cannot hear any sound.

4 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

5 Press DVD on the remote control to select

DVD as the input source.

6 Play back the DVD on your DVD player using

the supplied remote control.

Audio signals from your DVD player are output from

this unit.

• You can check the digital signal being input at the DVD player

with the digital connection (optical/coaxial). Press ST+3BEAM

on the remote control while playing back a DVD recorded in 5.1

channel. The or indicator lights up when

this unit detects the 5.1 channel signal input at the optical/

coaxial jack. If the indicator lights up, confirm the digital

connection and the settings of the digital output, bitstream

output, and/or DTS output of the DVD player.

• If the output volume is too low, increase the volume on this unit

to around 45.

• If you have set the appropriate remote control codes for your

TV and DVD player, you can use the remote control supplied

with this unit to operate these components. For details on how

to set remote control codes, see page 77.

Playing back sources

Note

VCR

VOL

YSP

TV/AV

AUX

VOL

YSP

TV/AV

YSP

TV/AV

DVD

DIGITAL

PCM

39 En

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Press VOLUME +/– on the front panel or on the

remote control to increase or decrease the

volume level.

The numeric value of the volume level appears in the front

panel display.

Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99,

MAX (maximum)

• The volume level of all input sources (including multi-channel

as well as stereo sources) changes at the same time.

• One of the volume level increases or decreases each time you

press VOLUME +/–.

• You can continuously increase or decrease the volume level if

you press and hold VOLUME +/–.

1 Press MUTE on the remote control to mute

the sound.

AUDIO MUTE ON appears in the front panel

display, and the volume level indicator flashes.

2 Press MUTE on the remote control again (or

press VOLUME +/–) to resume the sound

output.

AUDIO MUTE OFF appears temporarily in the front

panel display (or the numeric value of the current

volume level appears if you press VOLUME +/–),

and the volume level indicator lights up.

The sound output of all input sources (including multi-channel as

well as stereo sources) is muted at the same time.

You can select whether the sound output is to be muted

completely or by 20 dB when you press MUTE (see page 64).

Adjusting the volume

Notes

STANDBY/ONVOLUME

INPUT

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

VOLUME

VOL

Front panel

Remote control

Muting the sound

Note

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

VOL

MUTE

Flashes

VOL

VOLUME

Lights up

MUTE

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

40 En

You can enjoy multi channel surround sound by changing the beam mode using the beam mode buttons on the remote

control. Select 3 beam, 5 beam and stereo plus 3 beam for multi channel playback.

When ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER is set in MANUAL SETUP (see page 59), 5 beam and 3 beam cannot be selected.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press one of the beam mode buttons

(5BEAM, ST+3BEAM or 3BEAM) to select the

desired beam mode for 5.1-channel play

back.

Outputs sound beams from the front left and right, center,

and surround left and right channels. This mode is ideal

for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when

watching DVDs recorded in a multi-channel format or

playing back 2-channel sources in a multi-channel format.

Press 5BEAM on the remote control to select the

5 beam.

• To achieve the best surround sound effect, make sure that there

are no obstacles placed in the path of sound beams in that the

objects may prevent the beams from rebounding directly off the

walls in your listening room.

• The front left and right sound beams are output towards the

walls in your listening room.

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

Note

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

5 beam

Notes

5BEAM

41 En

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Outputs normal sound from the front left and right

channels and sound beams from the center and surround

left and right channels. This mode is ideal for watching

live recordings on a DVD. Vocals and instrumental sounds

can be heard close to the center of the listening position

while sound reflections from the venue itself can be heard

on your right and left, giving you the feeling that you are

sitting right in front of the stage.

Press ST+3BEAM on the remote control to select

the stereo plus 3 beam.

The front left and right sound beams are output directly to the

listening position.

Outputs sound beams from the front left and right and

center channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies

with the whole family. Because the listening position area

is widened, you can enjoy excellent quality surround

sound over a wider area. In addition, you can use this

mode when the listening position is close to the backside

of the wall and the surround left and right beams cannot

reflect.

Press 3BEAM on the remote control to select the

3 beam.

You can achieve a more realistic surround effect if you adjust

settings for IMAGE LOCATION in BEAM MENU (see page 62).

• When you play back multi-channel sources, surround left and

right signals are mixed down and output from the front left and

right channels.

• The front left and right sound beams are output towards the

walls in your listening room.

Stereo plus 3 beam

Note

ST+3BEAM

3 beam

Notes

3BEAM

42 En

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

■ Decoder indicators

Depending on the input source and the selected surround

mode, the indicators in the front panel display light up as

follows:

• You can select an input mode (AUTO, DTS or ANALOG) by

pressing INPUTMODE on the remote control repeatedly (see

page 71).

• Discs encoded in DTS-ES or Dolby Digital 5.1 EX will be

played back in DTS or Dolby Digital.

■ Surround modes and recommended

sources

• Surround modes are available when the beam mode is set to a

setting other than the stereo playback or the my beam as the

beam mode.

• When you select an input source (see page 37), the surround

mode used for the previously selected input source is selected.

• If the power of this unit is turned off and on again, the surround

mode used for the previously selected input source before the

power was turned off is selected.

• The surround modes are available only when the CINEMA DSP

programs are turned off (see page 51) or when the movie

program is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see

page 50).

• Only Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie and DTS

Neo:6 Cinema are available when the movie program is selected

as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 50).

• If the surround modes are not available, “Prohibit” appears in

the front panel display when you press SURROUND on the

remote control.

• The surround modes are available only when 2-channel signals

are being input. If you try to switch between the surround

modes when 5.1 channel signals are being input, “Prohibit”

appears in the front panel display.

Status Indicator

When PCM signals are being

input

When DTS digital signals are

being input or when DTS Neo:6

is selected

When Dolby Digital signals are

being input

When Dolby Pro Logic is

selected

When Dolby Pro Logic II is

selected

PCM

DIGITAL

Surround mode

Recommended

source

Dolby Pro Logic – All sources

Dolby Pro Logic II

Movie

Music

Game

Movies

Music

Games

DTS Neo:6

Cinema

Music

Movies

Music

Notes

43 En

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 5.1 channel

playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound

effects by switching the surround mode.

The surround modes are available only when the CINEMA DSP

programs are turned off (see page 51) or when the movie program

is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 50). In

addition, the beam mode must be set to the 5 beam, the stereo

plus 3 beam or the 3 beam (see page 40).

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press SURROUND on the remote control

repeatedly (or press SURROUND and then

press / ) to switch between surround

modes.

Enjoying 2-channel sources

in surround sound

STEREO

MY BEAM

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

YSP

TV/AV

YSP

TV/AV

SURROUND

ENTER

PRO LOGIC

PLII Movie

PLII Music

PLII Game

Neo:6 Cinema

Neo:6 Music

Example of the surround

mode display in the front

panel display when the

CINEMA DSP program is

turned off

44 En

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

You can enjoy analog audio signals output from your TV

in real surround sound.

Before performing the steps below, set the volume of this unit to

30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in step 4 below.

1 Select the TV channel you want to watch.

To select a TV channel, use the remote control

supplied with your TV.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

3 Press TV on the remote control.

This unit outputs audio signals from your TV.

4 If you hear sound from your TV speakers,

reduce the volume level of your TV until you

can no longer hear any audio being output.

To reduce the TV volume level, use the remote

control supplied with your TV.

5 Press VOLUME +/– on the remote control to

adjust the volume level.

6 Press SURROUND repeatedly (or press

SURROUND and then press / ) on the

remote control to select a surround mode.

Signals input from 2-channel sources are played back

on multiple channels.

For more information on surround modes, see

page 42.

Enjoying TV in surround sound

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

YSP

TV/AV

VOLUME

SURROUND

ENTER

45 En

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can configure the parameters for Dolby Pro Logic II

Music and DTS Neo:6 Music to fine-tune the surround

sound effect.

1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Enjoying 2-channel

sources in surround sound” on page 43 and

select PL II Music or Neo:6 Music.

2 Press / to select the parameter.

3 Press / to configure the parameter.

■ When Dolby Pro Logic II Music is

selected

PANORAMA

Gives front left and right channel sound a wraparound

effect, distributed throughout the entire surround

sound field to give you an expansive feeling.

Choices: ON/OFF

Default setting: OFF

DIMENSION

Adjusts the difference in volume between front and

surround channels to the volume balance you desire.

Control range: –3 (toward the surround direction) to

+3 (toward the front direction)

Default setting: STD

CT WIDTH

Distributes the center channel sound to the left and

right. If set to 0, center channel sounds output only

from the center channel.

Control range: 0 to 7

Default setting: 3

■ When DTS Neo:6 Music is selected

C. IMAGE

Adjusts the center image from three channels (front

and center) to varying degrees.

Control range: 0.0 (wider) to 1.0 (toward the center)

Default setting: 0.3

Adjusting surround mode

parameters

STEREO

MY BEAM

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

ENJOYING STEREO SOUND

46 En

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback by changing the

beam mode to the stereo playback using the beam mode

buttons on the remote control. The normal sounds are

output from the front and left channels in the 2-channel

stereo. This is ideal for playing back hi-fi sources, such as

CDs, and can be used to replace your TV speakers.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press STEREO on the remote control to

select the stereo playback as a beam mode.

• When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except

those for the front left and right channels are mixed down and

output from the front left and right channels. No audio is output

from the center and rear channels.

• The surround mode becomes disabled when the stereo playback

is selected as the beam mode.

• When you play back Dolby Digital audio signals in the stereo

playback, the dynamic range becomes compressed. If the

volume level decreases to the extreme, use other beam modes

except the my beam.

• If the stereo playback is selected as the beam mode, the

surround modes (see page 42) and the CINEMA DSP programs

(see page 50) become ineffective.

ENJOYING STEREO SOUND

Stereo playback

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

Notes

PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (MY BEAM)

47 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can improve listenability in a noisy environment by changing the beam mode to the my beam, outputs sound beams

directly to the listening position in a single channel. In addition, the my beam is also ideal if you do not want the sound

beams to be reflected on the walls in your listening room or if you do not disturb others asleep while enjoying music or

movies at night.

If the my beam is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 42), the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 49) and the

TruBass (see page 54) become ineffective. In addition, no audio is output from the subwoofer connected to this unit.

The my beam microphone on the remote control collects

the test tones from this unit, and then the beam angle is

automatically adjusted.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press and hold MY BEAM on the remote

control more than 2 seconds.

A test tone is output twice from this unit. Keep

pointing the remote control toward this unit during

the test tones are being output so that the my beam

microphone can collect the test tones.

Control range: L50° to R50°

Operation guarantee range: 6 m, L30° to R30°

• If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and MY BEAM

ERROR is displayed on the front panel display.

• An error may occur if the listening room is noisy. Make sure

that the listening room is as quiet as possible during the test

tones are being output.

• Do not shake or move the remote control during the test tones

are being output.

• Do not cover the my beam microphone on the remote control

during the test tones are being output.

• The batteries in the remote control may be week if the remote

control does not function properly. In such case, replace all the

batteries and then try the procedure again.

PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (My beam)

Note

POWER

STANDBY/ON

STEREO

MY BEAM

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

YSP

TV/AV

My beam

microphone

Using auto-adjust function

YSP

TV/AV

MY BEAM

Notes

48 En

PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (My beam)

You can adjust the beam angle manually while playing

back an input source. This function is also ideal if the

listening position is out of the operation guarantee range

of the auto-adjust function.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press MY BEAM on the remote control.

MY BEAM is displayed in the front panel display.

3 Press / while MY BEAM is displayed to

adjust the angle.

Control range: L90° to R90°

• Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle

on the left side.

• Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle

on the right side.

Using manual-adjust function

YSP

TV/AV

MY BEAM

ENTER

VOL

USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

49 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

stereo or multi-channel sources. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA CINEMA DSP (digital sound field

processing) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most

of the sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls,

music venues and movie theaters.

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS and Dolby Surround sources.

Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference and do not purely rely on the name of the sound field program itself.

A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the

room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable the listener to tell where the player is situated as well

as the size and shape of the room in which the listening is sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine with the direct sound coming straight

to our ears from the player’s instrument to make up the sound field.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 80 ms after the direct sound) after reflecting from one

surface only (from the ceiling or a wall, for example). Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (i.e. wall, ceiling, the back of the room, etc.) so numerous

that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct

sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and

shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound

fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be

able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a

dance floor or a listening room of virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what

YAMAHA has done with the CINEMA DSP technology.

USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

Note

What is a sound field?

50 En

USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

You can select from three different sound field programs

(MUSIC, MOVIE and SPORTS) depending on the type of

sources you want to enjoy.

• The CINEMA DSP programs are not available if the stereo

playback (see page 46) or the my beam (see page 47) is selected

as the beam mode.

• If the CINEMA DSP programs are not available, “Prohibit”

appears in the front panel display when you press one of the

sound field program buttons on the remote control.

■ Music program

Select this sound field program when you play music

sources. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and

lets you feel as if you are seated in an actual rock or jazz

concert hall.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press MUSIC on the remote control to select

the music sound field program.

■ Movie program

Select this sound field program when you play movie

sources, especially the ones encoded in Dolby Digital,

DTS or Dolby Surround. This program clearly reproduces

dialog and sound effects, thus creating a broad and

expansive cinematic space amid silence.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press MOVIE on the remote control to select

the movie sound field program.

■ Sports program

Select this sound field program when you play sports

sources. This program densely concentrates the vocal

sound of the commentator in the center while broadening

the sound from the audience or the environment all around

your listening room.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press SPORTS on the remote control to

select the sports sound field program.

Turning on CINEMA DSP programs

Notes

STEREO

MY BEAM

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

MUSIC

YSP

TV/AV

MOVIE

YSP

TV/AV

SPORTS

51 En

USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Turn off the CINEMA DSP programs if you want to enjoy

the original sound without the sound field program effect.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press OFF on the remote control to turn off

the sound field programs.

CINEMA DSP OFF is shown in the front panel

display.

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset

parameters. However, you can also adjust the effect level

of the CINEMA DSP programs relative to the level of the

direct sound so that each sound field program can reflect

your listening environment and your preference even more

accurately.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press MUSIC, MOVIE or SPORTS on the

remote control to select the desired sound

field program.

3 Press / on the remote control.

DSP LEVEL is shown in the front panel display.

4 Press / on the remote control to adjust

the effect level of the CINEMA DSP programs.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

• A larger value increases the effect level.

• A smaller value decreases the effect level.

Turning off CINEMA DSP programs

YSP

TV/AV

OFF

VOL

Adjusting CINEMA DSP effect levels

YSP

TV/AV

SPORTS

MOVIE

MUSIC

or or

VOL

ENTER

USING THE VOLUME MODE (NIGHT LISTENING MODE/TV VOLUME EQUAL MODE)

52 En

The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. In addition, you can limit

the volume level of the TV so that it will not vary suddenly to a great extent whenever the contents being broadcast

change (i.e. due to commercials, etc.).

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press VOL MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select NIGHT:CINEMA,

NIGHT:MUSIC, TV EQUAL VOL or OFF.

The NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel

display when NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC

is selected.

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select TV EQUAL VOL when watching TV

programs.

• Select OFF to turn off the volume mode.

USING THE VOLUME MODE

(Night listening mode/TV volume equal mode)

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

NIGHT:CINEMA

NIGHT:MUSIC

TV EQUAL VOL

OFF

VOL MODE

NIGHT

Lights up

53 En

USING THE VOLUME MODE (Night listening mode/TV volume equal mode)

BASIC

OPERATION

English

3 Press / on the remote control to adjust

the effect level of compression while

NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC or TV EQUAL

VOL is displayed.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MIN for minimum compression.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MID for standard compression.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MAX for maximum

compression.

The volume mode settings are canceled if you press

STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control

or if you disconnect the power supply cable from the AC

wall outlet.

Note

Effect.Lvl:MIN

Effect.Lvl:MID

Effect.Lvl:MAX

ENTER

USING BASS SOUND ENHANCER (TRUBASS)

54 En

This unit can produce the perception of an improved low frequency performance with the aid of the SRS TruBass

technology, which improves bass even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a

subwoofer.

The TruBass is not available when the my beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 47).

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press on the remote control.

The current setting (TruBass ON or TruBass OFF) is

shown in the front panel display.

3 Press on the remote control repeatedly

to select TruBass ON or TruBass OFF.

• Select TruBass OFF to turn off the TruBass.

USING BASS SOUND ENHANCER (TruBass)

Note

STEREO

MY BEAM

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

YSP

TV/AV

YSP

TV/AV

VOL

TruBass ON

TruBass OFF

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

55 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified time period. The sleep timer is useful

if you are going to sleep after a certain amount of time while this unit is still playing back a source.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press SLEEP on the remote control

repeatedly to set the amount of time for the

sleep timer.

Choices: 120min, 90min, 60min, 30min, OFF

The SLEEP indicator in the front panel display

flashes while switching the amount of time for the

sleep timer.

Each time you press SLEEP on the remote control,

the front panel display changes as shown below.

3 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated.

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

Setting the sleep timer

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

SLEEP

Flashes

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60min

SLEEP 30min

SLEEP OFF

SLEEP

Lights up

56 En

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press SLEEP on the remote control

repeatedly so that SLEEP OFF appears in the

front panel display.

3 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator disappears from the front panel

display, indicating that the sleep timer is deactivated.

The previous setting for the sleep timer before you deactivate it is

stored in the system memory and automatically restored when

you make a new setting next time.

The sleep timer setting can also be deactivated if you press

STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control to set

this unit to the standby mode or unplug the power supply cable

from the AC outlet.

Canceling the sleep timer

Note

YSP

TV/AV

SLEEP

VOL

SLEEP OFF

SLEEP

Disappears

MANUAL SETUP

57 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

To achieve the best quality surround sound, you can use MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune the listening environment

parameters, as well as to make advanced settings for sound signals, sound beams, digital input and the OSD. Change the

initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your own listening environment.

• You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 34). A set of settings optimized according to specific

conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening environment (see

page 35).

• Most of the parameters in SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU are automatically set when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 27). Use

SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU to make additional adjustments.

• BEAM MENU allows you to make settings for the surround sound effects normally available in the speaker settings menu.

• Make settings for the parameters in BEAM MENU first before you make settings for the parameters in SOUND MENU, INPUT

MENU and DISPLAY MENU.

SOUND MENU

Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the sound output.

BEAM MENU

Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the sound beam output.

INPUT MENU

Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the audio and video input.

DISPLAY MENU

Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the display.

MANUAL SETUP

Item Features Page

TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or low-frequency sound.

SUBWOOFER SET Adjusts the various subwoofer settings.

MUTE LEVEL Adjusts the muting level.

AUDIO DELAY Adjusts audio delay.

ROOM EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the listening room.

DD/DTS Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Item Features Page

SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts listening room and listening position settings.

BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts various beam settings.

IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front left and right channels.

Item Features Page

INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

INPUT MODE Selects the initial input of the source.

INPUT TRIM Adjusts the input level of the source.

INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source.

Item Features Page

DIMMER SET Adjusts the brightness of the display.

OSD SET Adjusts the display position and the background color of the OSD.

UNIT SET Changes the display unit of measurement.

58 En

MANUAL SETUP

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

You can adjust the SET MENU parameters while the unit is

reproducing sound.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press MENU on the remote control.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed on

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN on the remote control.

• To cancel the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MANUAL SETUP and

then press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select a sub menu and then

press ENTER.

5 Press / / / and ENTER to configure

each parameter.

6 Press MENU to exit.

The OSD disappears from your TV screen.

Using MANUAL SETUP

STEREO

MY BEAM

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

SURROUND

OFF

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)SOUND MENU

2)BEAM MENU

3)INPUT MENU

4)DISPLAY MENU

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MANUAL SETUP

ENTER

59 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the

sound beam output.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM MENU

You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel in

“ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE” (see page 68).

■ SETTING PARAMETERS

(Setting parameters)

Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room

and the distance of this unit from the listening position.

When you make settings for each parameter, other related

parameters are automatically adjusted to best match your

listening environment.

If you make adjustments in SETTING PARAMETERS, the beam

optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will

be lost. If you want to keep the beam optimization settings made

in the AUTO SETUP and make further adjustments, adjust

settings in BEAM ADJUSTMENT first (see page 60).

INSTALLED POSITION

(Installed position of this unit)

Use to adjust the installed position of this unit.

Choices: FLAT TO WALL (Parallel to wall installation),

ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER

(Corner installation)

• Select FLAT TO WALL if this unit is installed in

parallel with the wall in your listening room. Adjust the

width and length of your listening room as well as the

distance of the listening position from this unit and the

distance of the center of this unit from the left wall.

Choices for the room width and length:

2.0 m to 12.0 m

Choices for the listening position from this unit:

1.8 m to 9.0 m

Choices for the listening position from the left wall:

0.6 m to 11.4 m

BEAM MENU

Note

A)SETTING PARAMETERS

B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT

C)IMAGE LOCATION

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

2)BEAM MENU

INSTALLED POSITION

;;;;;FLAT TO WALL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3

FLAT TO WALL

ANGLE TO WALL

OR CORNER

Listening position

from the left wall

Listening position

from the unit

Room width

Room length

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3

-------[ 5.4m ]-

4.9m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

--------|

2.7m [ 2.5m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3

Room width and length

Listening position from the

unit and the left wall

60 En

MANUAL SETUP

• Select ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER if this unit is

installed in the corner in your listening room. Adjust

the width and length of your listening room as well as

the distance of the listening position from this unit.

Choices for the room width and length:

2.0 m to 12.0 m

Choices for the listening position from this unit:

1.8 m to 9.0 m

When you set the INSTALLED POSITION parameter in

MANUAL SETUP (see page 59), the parameters newly set for

the width and length of your listening room are automatically set

as the factory default value.

■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment)

Use to manually adjust the various beam settings. We

recommend that you select 5 beam as the beam mode

before adjusting these parameters.

• When INSTALLED POSITION is adjusted in MANUAL

SETUP (see page 59), the factory default value is automatically

set for this parameter except CENTER in FOCAL LENGTH

(see page 61).

• Depending on the beam mode settings (see pages 40 and 46),

some channel positions may not be available for selection. In

this case, “– –” is displayed. When using the stereo plus 3 beam

as the beam mode, set the surround left and right signals to be

output from the front left and right channels.

HORIZONTAL ANGLE (Horizontal angle)

Use to adjust the horizontal angle of beams for each

channel. By adjusting the horizontal angle of the beams,

you can optimize the sound beam paths. A test tone is

automatically output.

Choices: L90° to R90°

Adjust towards L (left) to move the direction of the output

to the left and adjust towards R (right) to move it to the

right.

Note

Listening position

from the unit

Room length

Room width

----- 5.4m ---

[ 5.4m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3

[ 2.5m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3

Room width and length

Listening position from

the unit

Notes

a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE

b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH

c)FOCAL LENGTH

d)TREBLE GAIN

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT

(−)

(+)

(−)

5 beam

Front L

L65deg L90 R90

0(deg)

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE 1/5

61 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH (Beam travel length)

A certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound

from each channel so that all sound will arrive at the

listening position at the same time. This menu sets the

distance that sound beams travel after being output and

reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening

position and adjust the delay applied to the respective

channel.

The lines in the illustration below indicate the distance.

Choices: 0.3 m to 24.0 m

• Front L adjusts the distance the front left channel

sound beams travel.

• Front R adjusts the distance the front right channel

sound beams travel.

• Center adjusts the distance the center channel sound

beams travel.

• Surround L adjusts the distance the surround left

channel sound beams travel.

• Surround R adjusts the distance the surround right

channel sound beams travel.

We recommend that you use the setting optimized by the AUTO

SETUP (see page 27). Set this menu only when you changed the

HORIZONTAL ANGLE (see page 60).

FOCAL LENGTH (Focal length)

Use to set the distance from the front of this unit to the

focal point of output for each channel and adjust an

expansive feeling of each channel.

The focal points except the center channel should be set

near the reflection points on the walls. The shorter the

distance, more the expansion.

Choices: –1.0 m to +13.0 m

Adjust towards – (minus) to move the focus outward and

adjust towards + (plus) to move the focus towards the

normal position.

• Front L adjusts the focal length for the front left sound

beams.

• Front R adjusts the focal length for the front right

sound beams.

• Center adjusts the focal length for the center sound

beams. Initial setting: –0.5 m

• Surround L adjusts the focal length for the surround

left sound beams.

• Surround R adjusts the focal length for the surround

right sound beams.

We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.5 m) for the

center channel.

5 beam

Front L;;;;;;;6.0m

Front R;;;;;;;6.0m

Center;;;;;;;;2.5m

Surround L;;;;9.1m

Surround R;;;;9.1m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH

focal length

focal point

sweet spot

Front left channel Center channel

5 beam

Front L;;;;;;+1.5m

Front R;;;;;;+1.5m

Center;;;;;;;-0.5m

Surround L;;;+2.3m

Surround R;;;+2.3m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

c)FOCAL LENGTH

62 En

MANUAL SETUP

TREBLE GAIN (Treble gain)

Use to adjust the high frequency output level of each

channel.

If the reflection point of the front left and right or surround left

and right sound beams is a curtain or other acoustically absorbent

surface, you can achieve more effective surround sound by

increasing the treble level for those sound beams.

Choices: –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

• FL adjusts the high frequency output level of the front

left channel.

• FR adjusts the high frequency output level of the front

right channel.

• C adjusts the high frequency output level of the center

channel.

• SL adjusts the high frequency output level of the

surround left channel.

• SR adjusts the high frequency output level of the

surround right channel.

■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location)

Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and

right channel sound is heard so that the each sound can be

heard closer to the center channel.

Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound

coming from the front left and right seems unnatural, such

as when your listening position is not the center of your

listening room.

You can only adjust this parameter when 3 beam or 5

beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 40).

Choices: ON, OFF

Setting range: 0% to 95%

Initial setting: 0%

LEFT (Left)

Adjusts audio signals towards the left.

The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the

center.

RIGHT (Right)

Adjusts audio signals towards the right.

The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the

center.

-5beam+

Front L;;;;;;;;0dB

Front R;;;;;;;;0dB

Center;;;;;;;;;0dB

Surround L;;;;;0dB

Surround R;;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

d)TREBLE GAIN

------

OFF )ON

LCR

LEFT;;;;;;;;;;;0%

RIGHT;;;;;;;;;;0%

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

C)IMAGE LOCATION

Without adjustment

With the front left

channel adjusted

Without adjustment

With the front right

channel adjusted

63 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the

sound output.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SOUND MENU

■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control)

You can adjust the tonal quality of the sound beams.

TREBLE (Treble)

Use to adjust the high frequency response.

Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

BASS (Bass)

Use to adjust the low frequency response.

Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer set)

Use to manually adjust various subwoofer settings.

BASS OUT (Bass out)

Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the

subwoofer and/or the front left and right channels. This

setting also determines the routing of LFE (low-frequency

effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT

• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the subwoofer.

• Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the front left and right channels.

CROSS OVER (Cross over)

When BASS OUT is set to SWFR, you can use this

feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all

low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected

frequency will be sent to the subwoofer speaker position.

Choices: 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz

LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level)

Select to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer. The LFE channel carries low-frequency

special effects which are only added to certain scenes.

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby

Digital or DTS signals.

Choices: –20 to 0 dB

DISTANCE (Distance)

Select to adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the

listening position.

Choices: 0.3 to 15.0 m

Initial setting: 3.0 m

SOUND MENU

A)TONE CONTROL

B)SUBWOOFER SET

C)MUTE LEVEL

D)AUDIO DELAY

E)ROOM EQ

F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1)SOUND MENU

TREBLE;;;;;0dB

BASS;;;;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)TONE CONTROL

------

BASS OUT;;;;;FRONT

CROSS OVER;;;100Hz

LFE LEVEL;;;;;;0dB

DISTANCE;;;;;;3.0m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

B)SUBWOOFER SET

64 En

MANUAL SETUP

■ MUTE LEVEL (Muting level)

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

volume level.

Choices: MUTE, –20 dB

• Select MUTE to completely halt all sound output.

• Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume level by

20 dB.

■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay)

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 160 msec

■ ROOM EQ (Room equalizer)

Use to change the tonal qualities of your listening room

when the unit is mounted on the wall.

Choices: MOUNTING (Mount type),

REFLECTING (Reflectivity type)

MOUNTING (Mount type)

Use to enhance medium to low range sounds.

Choices: WALL (Wall mount), SHELF (Shelf mount)

• Select WALL if this unit is mounted on the wall in your

listening room.

• Select SHELF if this unit is mounted on the shelf in

your listening room.

REFLECTING (Reflectivity type)

Use to select the reflectivity of your listening room.

Choices: NORMAL (Normal), HI ECHO (High echo)

• Select NORMAL if your listening room has a normal

reflectivity.

• Select HI ECHO if your listening room has highly

reflective surfaces such as concrete walls.

■ DD/DTS Dynamic Range

(Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and

DTS signals)

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression.

This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding

Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Dynamic range is the

difference between the smallest sound that can be heard

above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound

that can be heard without distortion.

Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),

MAX (maximum)

Select to adjust the dynamic range compression.

• Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume

levels.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MAX for feature films.

MUTE -20dB

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

C)MUTE LEVEL

AUDIO DELAY;;;;;0msec

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

D)AUDIO DELAY

MOUNTING;;;;;SHELF

REFLECTING;;;NORMAL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

)ROOM EQ

MIN STD MAX

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range

65 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the

audio and video input.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → INPUT MENU

■ INPUT ASSIGNMENT (Input assignment)

Use to assign the optical and coaxial digital input jacks of

this unit to other components if the initial settings of this

unit do not correspond to your needs. By assigning other

components to the input jacks on this unit, you can display

the name of the connected component in the front panel

display and OSD, and operate the component with the

input selector button of the same name. If you connect a

component to the input jacks of this unit and do not assign

it, the default component name for that input jack is

displayed in the front panel and OSD when selected.

• Select OPTICAL IN (1) to assign components to the

TV OPTICAL IN jack of this unit.

Choices: TV, VCR

• Select OPTICAL IN (2) to assign components to the

AUX OPTICAL IN jack of this unit.

Choices: AUX, DVD

• Select COAXIAL IN to assign components to the

COAXIAL IN jack of this unit.

Choices: DVD, AUX

■ INPUT MODE (Input mode)

Use to designate the input mode for the input sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on

the power of this unit. For information on the types of

audio signals that can be output by this unit, see “Surround

modes and recommended sources” on page 42.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect

the type of input signal and select the appropriate input

mode.

• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the

last input mode used for that input source. If the type of

input signal is different from the setting, no sounds will

be produced.

■ INPUT TRIM (Input trim)

Use to adjust the input level of the input source.

• Select TV ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the TV/STB analog audio input

jacks of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select TV OPTICAL to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the TV OPTICAL IN jack of this

unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select VCR ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the VCR analog audio input

jacks of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select AUX OPTICAL to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the AUX OPTICAL IN jack of

this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select DVD COAXIAL to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the COAXIAL IN jack of this

unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

INPUT MENU

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT

B)INPUT MODE

C)INPUT TRIM

D)INPUT RENAME

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

3 INPUT MENU

OPTICAL IN

(1);;;;; TV

(TV)

(2);;;;; AUX

( AUX )

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT 1/2

COAXIAL IN

(3);;;;; DVD

( DVD )

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT 2/2

AUTO LAST

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

B)INPUT MODE

TV ANALOG;;;-3.0dB

OPTICAL;;-3.0dB

VCR ANALOG;;;-3.0dB

AUX COAXIAL;;-3.0dB

DVD COAXIAL;;-3.0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

C)INPUT TRIM

66 En

MANUAL SETUP

■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename)

Use to change the name of the input source in the OSD

and the front panel display. Press an input selector button

(TV, STB, DVD, VCR, or AUX) to select the component

you want to change the name for and then perform the

following procedure.

1 Press / to place the _ (underbar) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

The _ (underbar) flashes.

2 Press / to select the desired character.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press to change the character in the following

order or press to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *,

+, etc.

3 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input.

4 Press ENTER to exit.

The new names are registered, and the display returns

to the previous screen.

DVD -> DVD

[ ]/[ ]:Position

[ ]/[ ]:Character

[ENTER]:Return

D)INPUT RENAME

ENTER

67 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the

display.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → DISPLAY MENU

■ DIMMER SET (Dimmer settings)

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer)

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display

when you operate this unit by using the control buttons on

the front panel or on the remote control.

Choices: –2, –1, OFF

AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer)

If no operation is performed for a specified period, the

front panel display dims. Use to adjust the brightness of

the front panel display in this case.

Choices: OFF (the same brightness as the STANDARD

DIMMER setting), –1 to –3 (based on the

STANDARD DIMMER setting), DISPLAY OFF

■ OSD SET (OSD settings)

Use to adjust the display position and the background

color of the OSD.

OSD SHIFT (OSD shift)

Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust

towards the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the

OSD, and adjust towards the + (plus) direction to lower it.

Choices: –5 to +5

Initial setting: 0

OSD BACK COLOR (OSD background color)

Use to select the background color of the OSD.

Choices: BLUE, GRAY

■ UNIT SET (Unit settings)

Use this to change the display unit of measurement.

Choices: METERS, FEET

• Select METERS to input distances in meters.

• Select FEET to input distances in feet.

DISPLAY MENU

A)DIMMER SET

B)OSD SET

C)UNIT SET

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

4 DISPLAY MENU

STANDARD DIMMER;;;;;OFF

AUTO DIMMER

;;;;;;;;;;;;;OFF

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)DIMMER SET

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;0

OSD BACK COLOR;;;BLUE

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

B)OSD SET

METERS FEET

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

C)UNIT SET

ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE

68 En

You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel by using the test tone or the audio output being played back

in each beam mode to achieve a more true-to-life surround sound experience.

You can use the test tone feature to output a test tone from

each channel to manually balance the channel levels.

Use the test tone to set channel levels so that the volume

level of each channel is identical when heard from your

listening position.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press TEST on the remote control.

TEST FRONT L appears in the front panel display

and a test tone is output from the front left channel.

3 Press / to select the channel you want

to adjust.

The front panel display changes as follows.

TEST SWFR is only available when a subwoofer is connected to

this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND

MENU (see page 63).

4 Press / to adjust channel volumes.

Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB

ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE

Using the test tone

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

OFF

+10

YSP

TV/AV

YSP

TV/AV

TEST

VOL

TEST FRONT L

Note

ENTER

TEST FRONT L

TEST CENTER

TEST FRONT R

TEST SUR.R

TEST SUR.L

TEST SWFR

ENTER

69 En

ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

5 Press TEST when you have completed all

your adjustments.

• All the channel levels cannot be adjusted when the stereo

playback or my beam is selected as the beam mode (see

pages 46 and 47).

• FRONT L/R cannot be adjusted when the stereo plus 3 beam is

selected as the beam mode (see page 41).

• FRONT L/R are automatically adjusted depending on the

settings of the other channels when the stereo plus 3 beam or

stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 41 and

46).

If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, – –dB

appears in the front panel display.

You can also manually adjust the channel levels while

playing back an input source such as a DVD.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press CH LEVEL repeatedly (or press

CH LEVEL and then / ) to select the

channel you want to adjust.

The front panel display changes as follows.

Notes

TEST

Using the audio output being

played back

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

OFF

+10

YSP

TV/AV

YSP

TV/AV

CH LEVEL

ENTER

CH LEVEL

FRONT L +1.0dB

CENTER -2.5dB

FRONT R +1.0dB

SUR.R +2.0dB

SUR.L +2.0dB

SWFR --dB

70 En

ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE

SWFR is only available when a subwoofer is connected to this

unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND MENU

(see page 63).

3 Press / to adjust channel volumes.

Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB

4 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit when you have completed your

adjustment.

• All the channel levels cannot be adjusted when the stereo

playback is selected as the beam mode (see page 46).

• FRONT L/R cannot be adjusted when the stereo plus 3 is

selected as the beam mode (see page 41).

• Only CENTER can be adjusted when the my beam is selected

as the beam mode (see page 47).

• FRONT L/R are automatically adjusted depending on the

settings of the other channels when the stereo plus 3 beam or

stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 41 and

46).

If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, – –dB

appears in the front panel display.

Note

Notes

ENTER

SELECTING THE INPUT MODE

71 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can select the type of audio input signals of the selected input source according to your preference or the conditions

of the input source.

We recommend setting the input mode to AUTO in most cases.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control to select the desired input

source.

3 Press INPUTMODE on the remote control

repeatedly to toggle between input modes.

• The input mode of VCR is fixed to ANALOG. However, if the

TV OPTICAL IN jack of this unit is assigned to VCR, AUTO,

DTS and ANALOG become available as the input mode of

VCR (see page 65).

• ANALOG is not available as the input mode of DVD and AUX.

•AUTO

Automatically selects audio input signals in the following

priority order:

1) Dolby Digital or DTS

2) PCM

3) Analog

Use this input mode in most cases.

•DTS

Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS.

Compared to AUTO, this input mode provides greater

stability while playing back CDs or LDs encoded in DTS.

• ANALOG

Selects only analog signals.

Even when both digital and analog signals are input

simultaneously, only analog signals are selected.

You can adjust the default input mode to be selected when the

power of this unit is turned on (see page 65).

SELECTING THE INPUT MODE

POWER

STANDBY/ON

INPUT2

SLEEP

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

STB VCR DVD

YSP

TV/AV

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

TV AUTO

TV DTS

TV ANALOG

DVD AUTO

DVD DTS

AUX AUTO

AUX DTS

INPUTMODE

When TV or STB

is selected as

the input source

When DVD is

selected as the

input source

When AUX is

selected as the

input source

Notes

ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS

72 En

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to

adjust and customize the way this unit operates.

Follow the procedure below to enter the system

parameters.

1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to

turn off the power of this unit.

2 Press and hold INPUT on the front panel and

then press STANDBY/ON on the front panel

to turn on the power of this unit.

MEMORY PROTECT is shown in the front panel

display.

3 Release INPUT on the front panel.

You can protect the settings you saved in the system

memory of this unit from being accidentally erased or

unwantedly changed.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on this page.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

3 Confirm that MEMORY PROTECT is shown in

the front panel display and then press

ENTER.

ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Using the system parameters

STANDBY/ONVOLUME

INPUT

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

STANDBY/ON

INPUT

STANDBY/ON

VOL

MEMORY PROTECT

Setting the MEMORY PROTECT

INPUT

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

VOL

MEMORY PROTECT

73 En

ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

4 Press / to switch between PROTECT: ON

and PROTECT: OFF.

• Select PROTECT: ON to activate the protection

feature.

• Select PROTECT: OFF to deactivate the protection

feature.

5 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set

this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

You can set the maximum volume level so that this unit

will not output sound beyond the limited volume level.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 72.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

3 Press / on the remote control so that

MAX VOLUME SET is shown in the front

panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

5 Press / to adjust the maximum volume

level.

Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, MIN

Control step: 1

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set

this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting for the maximum volume level will

be activated when you turn on the power of this unit

next time.

Setting the MAX VOLUME

ENTER

VOL

PROTECT: ON

VOL

PROTECT: OFF

STANDBY/ON

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

VOL

MAX VOLUME SET

ENTER

STANDBY/ON

74 En

ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS

You can set the initial volume level when the power of this

unit is turned on.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 72.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

3 Press / on the remote control so that

TURN ON VOLUME is shown in the front

panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

5 Press / to adjust the initial volume level.

Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, OFF

Control step: 1

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set

this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting for the maximum volume level will

be activated when you turn on the power of this unit

next time.

You can test the beam output from this unit to experience

the sound beam.

You can also perform this function simply by pressing INPUT on

the front panel. A sound beam is output from this unit when you

press and hold INPUT for more than 2 seconds. The sound beam

shuttles between left and right twice, and then stops.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 72.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

3 Press / on the remote control so that

DEMO MODE is shown in the front panel

display.

Setting the TURN ON VOLUME

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

VOL

TURN ON VOLUME

ENTER

Setting the DEMO MODE

STANDBY/ON

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

VOL

DEMO MODE

75 En

ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

4 Press / to switch between DEMO: ON

and DEMO: OFF.

• Select DEMO: ON to activate the demo mode.

• Select DEMO: OFF to deactivate the demo mode.

5 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set

this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

Press ENTER to test the sound beam.

The sound beam being output shuttles between left

and right. Press ENTER again to stop shuttling.

You can reset all of the parameters of this unit to the

factory presets. This procedure completely resets ALL the

parameters in SET MENU.

After performing the following procedure you must run the

AUTO SETUP again to match your surround sound environment.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 72.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

3 Press / on the remote control so that

FACTORY PRESET is shown in the front

panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

VOL

DEMO: ON

VOL

DEMO: OFF

STANDBY/ON

Setting the FACTORY PRESET

Note

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

VOL

FACTORY PRESET

ENTER

76 En

ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS

5 Press / to switch between PRESET:

RESET and PRESET: CANCEL.

• Select PRESET: RESET to reset all of the current

settings.

• Select PRESET: CANCEL to cancel the resetting

procedure.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set

this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

ENTER

VOL

PRESET: RESET

VOL

PRESET: CANCEL

STANDBY/ON

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

77 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and

other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote

control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/AV to change the control area.

Depending on the external A/V component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even

if a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control.

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area (TV, STB, DVD, VCR and AUX).

For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer

to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of

this manual.

1 Press and hold CODE SET on the remote

control and then press one of the input

selector buttons to select the input source

you want to set a remote control code for.

The transmission indicator flashes twice and then

remains lit.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the

remote control code while holding down

CODE SET.

3 Refer to “Controlling other components” on

page 78 to operate the external component

using the remote control.

If the external component functions correctly, the

remote control code setup was successful.

If the external component does not function correctly,

the remote control code may be incorrect. Confirm

that the remote control code is correct (see “LIST OF

REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this

manual) and start over from step 1.

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,

try each of them until you find the correct one.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Note

Setting remote control codes

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

Note

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries and reset the remote control codes.

When changing the batteries, be careful not to press

any of the buttons on the remote control. Doing so will

clear the contents of the memory.

SPORTS

SURROUND

SPORTS

Setting example: YAMAHA DVD input area

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

78 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Operating your TV

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

then press TV to select TV as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the TV

operation mode.

1 TV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your TV.

2 TV INPUT1/2

Selects the input source of the TV.

3 Numeric buttons

Selects a TV channel for playback.

4 CH +/–

Switches between the available TV channels.

5 TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the audio output level of the TV.

6 TV INPUT

Switches the input source for the TV.

7 TV MUTE

Temporarily mutes audio output from the TV.

■ Operating your DVD player

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and then

press DVD to select DVD as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the DVD

operation mode.

1 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your DVD player.

2 Numeric buttons

Use to enter numeric digits.

3 MENU

Displays the DVD menu.

4 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

Use to select DVD menu items.

5 RETURN

Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit the

DVD menu.

6 Operation buttons for DVD and VCR players

Use to perform DVD player operations, such as play and

stop.

Controlling other components

YSP

TV/AV

POWER

STANDBY/ON

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

DVD

YSP

TV/AV

POWER

STANDBY/ON

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

79 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Operating your VCR

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

then press VCR to select VCR as the input

source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the VCR

operation mode.

1 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your VCR.

2 CH +/–

Switches between the available VCR channels.

3 Operation buttons for DVD and VCR

Use to perform VCR operations, such as play and stop.

■ Operating your STB

(CATV/Satellite tuner)

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

then press STB to select STB as the input

source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the STB

operation mode.

1 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your STB.

2 Numeric buttons

Use to enter numeric digits.

3 CH +/–

Switches between the available STB channels.

VCR

YSP

TV/AV

POWER

STANDBY/ON

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

STB

YSP

TV/AV

POWER

STANDBY/ON

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

80 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

The TV macro feature makes it possible to perform a

series of operations with the press of a single button. For

example, when you want to play a DVD, you would

normally turn on the component, select DVD as the input

source and press the play button to start playback. The TV

macro feature lets you perform all of these operations

simply by pressing the DVD macro button.

• Be sure to set up a remote control code for your TV before

setting macros.

• The ways to set macros differ if your TV does not have the

tuning capability.

• If you press any control buttons on the remote control other than

the ones used to set macros while setting macros, the setting

procedure is automatically canceled.

• If it takes more than 10 seconds in steps 2 and 3, the setting

procedure is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat from

step 1.

■ Setting macros for the TV with the

tuning capability

1 Press and hold CODE SET on the remote

control and then press one of the input

selector buttons to select the input source

you want to set macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO on the remote control while

holding down CODE SET.

3 Press CH +/– or the numeric buttons to select

the TV channel.

Check that the TV screen changes to the tuner screen.

4 Press TV INPUT on the remote control

repeatedly so that the screen changes to the

display of the input source selected in step 1.

5 Press ENTER on the remote control to

confirm the macro setting.

Using the TV macro

Notes

POWER

STANDBY/ON

STEREO

MY BEAM

INPUT2

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SURROUND

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

YSP

TV/AV

STB VCR DVD

TV MUTE

CODE SET

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

While holding

down, press

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

STEREO

OFF

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

MY BEAM SURROUND

MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS

TV INPUT

ENTER

81 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Setting macros for the TV without the

tuning capability

1 Press and hold CODE SET on the remote

control and then press one of the input

selector buttons to select the input source

you want to set macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO on the remote control while

holding down CODE SET.

3 Press INPUT1 on the remote control.

4 Press CH +/– or TV INPUT on the remote

control repeatedly so that the screen

changes to the display of the input source

selected in step 1.

5 Press ENTER on the remote control to

confirm the setting.

■ Operating macros

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to

switch to the operation mode of this unit.

2 Press and hold one of the input selector

buttons for approximately 2 seconds to

select the input source you want to operate

macros for.

The TV input changes at the same time the input

mode changes.

■ Canceling the macros

1 Press and hold CODE SET on the remote

control and then press one of the input

selector buttons to select the input source

you want to cancel the macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO on the remote control while

holding down CODE SET.

3 Press ENTER on the remote control to cancel

the macros.

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

INPUT1

TV INPUT

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

TV MUTE

CODE SET

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

While holding

down, press

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

ENTER

TROUBLESHOOTING

82 En

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power supply cable and contact

the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn on when

STANDBY/ON is pressed, or enters

the standby mode soon after the

power has been turned on.

The power supply cable is not firmly

connected to the AC wall outlet.

Connect the power supply cable firmly to

the AC wall outlet.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Set this unit to the standby mode,

disconnect the power supply cable, plug

it back in after 30 seconds, then use it

normally.

—

This unit suddenly enters the

standby mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool

down and then turn it back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source

again.

—

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the

problem persists, the cables may be

defective.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with

INPUT or the input selector buttons.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the

remote control to resume audio output

and then adjust the volume level.

Signals this unit cannot reproduce (such

as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz

of sampling frequency) are being

received from source component.

Play a source whose signals can be

reproduced by this unit.

—

Change the system settings of the source

component.

—

The sound suddenly goes off. The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source

again.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the

remote control to resume audio output

and then adjust the volume level.

No sound from the effect

channels.

You are playing back the source or

program in the stereo mode or my beam

mode.

Press one of the beam mode buttons on

the remote control to select a multi-

channel playback mode and then try to

play back the source or program once

more.

No sound from the center channel. The output level of the center channel is

set to minimum.

Raise the level of the center channel.

No sound from the surround

channels.

The output level of the surround

channels is set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround

channels.

No sound from the subwoofer. BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET is set

to FRONT.

Select SWFR.

The source does not contain low bass

signals.

83 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Distorted or too little bass sound. CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is

set incorrectly.

Set CROSS OVER correctly.

One of the night listening modes is

currently selected.

Turn off the night listening modes.

Too much bass sound. TruBass is currently turned on. Turn off TruBass.

The volume level of the subwoofer is too

high.

Turn down the volume level of the

subwoofer.

—

Surround sound effects are

insubstantial.

The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular

shaped room.

—

There is no wall in the path of the sound

beam.

Try placing a flat object, such as a board,

in the path of the sound beam.

—

Dolby Digital or DTS sources

cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or

DTS indicator does not light up in

the front panel display.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following

the operating instructions for your

component.

—

The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO.

There is noise interference when a

subwoofer is not connected to this

unit.

The protection circuitry was in operation

because a source with strong bass

elements was played back.

Turn down the volume level.

Select SWFR for BASS OUT.

Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings

for SUBWOOFER SET.

Low frequency sounds are

distorted.

CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is

set incorrectly.

Set CROSS OVER correctly.

On-screen display does not

appear.

The OSD video pin cable is not

connected properly.

Connect the cable properly.

This unit does not operate

properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock

(such as lightning or excessive static

electricity) or by a power supply with

low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power supply cable

from the outlet and then plug it in again

after about 30 seconds.

—

There is noise interference from

digital or high-frequency

equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or

high-frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such

equipment.

—

This unit does not output effect

sounds properly.

The original source includes surround

effects.

Disable surround effect settings on this

unit.

—

My beam auto-adjust function

does not work.

The listening room is too noisy. Keep the listening room as quiet as

possible.

—

Try manual adjustment.

The sound reflectivity of the listening

room is too much.

Set REFLECTING to HI ECHO.

The remote control may be operated

outside of the remote control operation

range.

The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m and no more than

30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

84 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control does not work

and/or function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m and no more than

30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

You cannot operate external

components with this unit’s

remote control.

The external component you want to

operate is not selected as the input

source.

Press INPUT on the front panel or the

input selector buttons on the remote

control to select the external component

you want to operate.

The remote control code was not

correctly set.

Set the remote control code correctly or

try another code for the same

manufacturer using the “LIST OF

REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the

end of this manual.

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Use the remote control supplied with the

external component.

—

The cursor buttons do not work

during SET MENU operation.

The operation mode selector was

unwantedly set to TV/AV.

Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

—

You cannot use the my beam auto-

adjust function.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m and no more than

30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

GLOSSARY

85 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has

a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By

using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound

processing provide listeners with previously unheard of

excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). Music and Game modes are also available for

2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy

the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a

left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus

an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-

channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that

enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround

back channel to existing 5.1-channel format.

■ DTS Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available; Music mode for playing music

sources and Cinema mode for movies.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code

modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

GLOSSARY

Audio formats

Audio information

INDEX

86 En

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ......................................... 27

Beam mode......................................................... 40, 46, 47

Cable clamp.................................................................... 14

Cardboard microphone stand.......................................... 29

Dolby Digital.................................................................. 42

Dolby Pro Logic ............................................................. 42

Dolby Pro Logic II.......................................................... 42

DTS ................................................................................ 42

DTS Neo: 6..................................................................... 42

Dynamic range................................................................ 64

Front panel display ........................................................... 7

LFE 0.1 channel.............................................................. 85

MANUAL SETUP ......................................................... 57

MEMORY ................................................................ 34, 35

My beam......................................................................... 47

On-screen display (OSD)................................................ 24

Optimizer microphone....................................................28

PCM................................................................................85

Power supply cable.........................................................21

Remote control......................................................9, 22, 23

Remote control code ....................................................... 77

SET MENU ....................................................................24

Sleep timer ...................................................................... 55

Sound field program ....................................................... 49

Surround mode................................................................40

Test tone..........................................................................68

TruBass ...........................................................................54

TV macro ........................................................................80

Volume mode .................................................................. 52

INDEX

SPECIFICATIONS

87 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

AMP SECTION

• Maximum Output Power (EIAJ)

................................................. 2 W (1 kHz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 21

20 W (100 Hz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 2

SPEAKER SECTION

Small dia. speakers ........ 4 cm cone magnetic shielding type × 21

Woofers ...........................10 cm cone magnetic shielding type × 2

• Input Jacks

AUDIO VCR, TV/STB (Analog) (1 V, 32 kΩ) ... 2 pairs (Analog)

AUDIO TV/STB, AUX (Optical) ................................. 2 (Digital)

AUDIO DVD (Coaxial) .................................................1 (Digital)

• Output Jacks

SUBWOOFER OUT (1.5 V, less than 120 Hz) ...... 1 (Subwoofer)

VIDEO OUT (1 Vp-p, 75 Ω) ............................................ 1 (OSD)

• System Connector Jack

OPTIMIZER MIC ....................................... 1 (Microphone input)

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[General model] ................................... AC 110–120 V, 50/60 Hz

[Asia model] .......................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption ................................................................. 30 W

• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 800 × 153 × 115 mm

• Weight .................................................................................... 9.0 kg

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

SPECIFICATIONS

LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES

LISTE DES CODES DE COMMANDE

LISTA DEI CODICI DI TELECOMANDO

LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE MANDO A DISTANCIA

ADMIRAL 292, 293, 216

AIWA 294, 276, 283, 284

AKAI 295, 296

ALBA

296

AOC 297

BELL &

HOWELL 292

BESTAR 298

BLAUPUNKT 229, 222

BLUE SKY 298

BRANDT 223

BROC SONIC 297

BUSH 296

BYD:SIGN 201, 202

CLATRONIC 298

CRAIG 224

CROSLEX 225

CURTIS MATHIS

297, 226

DAEWOO 297, 298, 224,

227, 228

DAYTRON 239

DUAL 298

DWIN 293, 281

EMERSON 297, 224, 239, 232

FURGUSON 223, 265, 266

FIRST LINE 298

FISHER 295, 233

FRABA 298

FUJITSU 289

FUNAI 277, 278

GE 293, 297, 234,

235, 236

GOODMANS 296, 298, 223

GRUNDIG 229, 238, 249

HITACHI 297, 239, 242,

243, 285, 206

ICE 296

IRRADIO 296

ITT/NOKIA 244, 245

JC PENNY 293, 297, 234, 237

JVC 296, 246, 247, 286

KENDO 298

KTV 297, 239

LG/GOLDSTAR

297, 298, 239, 237

LOEWE 298, 248

LXI 293, 297, 225,

226, 233, 298

MAGNAVOX 297, 225, 239, 298

MARANTZ 298, 210

MATSUI 295

MEDION 203, 204, 298

MEMOREX 297, 216

MITSUBISHI 299, 297, 259, 287

NAD 226, 255

NEC 297, 252, 282

NOKIA 244, 245

NOKIA OCEANIC

245

NORDMENDE 265, 266

ONWA 296

PANASONIC 234, 235, 236,

253, 288, 211

PHILCO 297, 225, 239, 298

PHILIPS 298, 225, 205

PIONEER 226, 235, 254,

255, 268

PORTLAND 297, 256

PROSCAN 293, 221

PROSCAN 231, 241, 251

PROTON 297, 250, 260, 270

QUASAR 234, 235

RADIO SHACK299, 293, 297

RCA 293, 297, 234,

256, 257, 258, 221

RUNCO 220, 230, 271

SABA 223, 269, 265, 266

SAMPO 281, 297, 280

SAMSUNG 297, 239, 248,

262, 275

SANYO 295, 233, 279,

272, 273, 274, 212

SCHNEIDER 296

SCOTT 297

SHARP 292, 239, 232, 213

SIEMENS 229

SIGNATURE 216

SIGNATURE 292

SONY 263, 214

SYLVANIA 297, 225, 298

SYNPHONIC 217, 218, 219

TELEFUNKUN269, 264, 265, 266

THOMSON 223, 266

TOSHIBA 292, 226, 267, 215

VIDECH 297, 242

WARDS 297, 239, 232, 216

YAMAHA 299, 292, 242,

285, 287, 253, 206

ZENITH 216, 261, 271

DVD PLAYER

AIWA 648, 649

APEX DIGITAL

652, 653, 654

BYD:SIGN 678, 679

DAEWOO 655

DENON 623, 624, 682

FUNAI 625

HARMAN/KARDON

656, 657

HITACHI 626

JVC 627

KENWOOD 628

KLH 658

LG/GOLDSTAR

645, 663, 664

MARANTZ 699, 659

MITSUBISHI 629

ONKYO 632, 633, 634

PANASONIC 623, 635, 668,

672, 682, 683, 684

PHILIPS 699, 647, 659

PIONEER 636, 637, 638,

673, 674, 675, 685

686, 687

RCA 639

SAMSUNG 642

SHARP 643

SONY 644, 676, 677

SYLVANIA 662

SYMPHONIC 662

THOMSON 646

TOSHIBA 634, 665, 666, 667

YAMAHA 699, 622, 623,

647, 682

ZERITH 663, 664

VCR

ADMIRAL 395

AIWA 396, 397, 398, 329

AKAI 322, 323, 324

AUDIO DYNAMIC

392, 394

BELL & HOWELL

393

BLAUPUNKT 325, 326

BROC SONIC 327

BUSH 322

CANON 325, 328

CGM 396, 332

CITIZEN 396

CRAIG 396, 363

CURTHIS MATHIS

397, 328, 333

DAEWOO 328, 334, 335

DBX 392, 394

DIMENSIA 333

DYNATECH 397

EMERSON 327, 334, 396, 397

FISHER 393, 336

FUNAI 397

GE 328, 333, 387

GO VIDEO 321, 331, 341,

351, 353, 363

GOODMANS 334, 337

GRUNDIG 332, 338

HITACHI 325, 333, 349,

342, 343

INSTANT REPLAY

325, 328

ITT/NOKIA 393

JC PENNY 392, 393, 394,

328, 333, 349,

396, 363

JVC 392, 394, 344,

345, 346, 347

KENDO 396

KENWOOD 392, 394, 396

LG/GOLDSTAR

396, 388

LOEWE 396, 337

LUXOR 395

LXI 393, 396, 397,

336, 349

MAGNAVOX 325, 326, 328

MARANTZ 392, 394

MARTA 396

MATSUI 396

MEMOREX 328, 336, 396, 397

MINOLTA 333, 349

MITSUBISHI 399, 344, 348,

359, 353, 352

MTC 363, 397

MULTITECH 397, 348, 354

NEC 392, 394, 344, 383

NOKIA 393, 395

NOKIA OCEANIC

395

OKANO 323

OLYMPIC 325, 328

ORION 327

PANASONIC 325, 328, 339,

355, 378, 384,

385, 386

PENTAX 333, 349

PHILCO 325, 328, 397

PHILLIPS 325, 326, 328,

337, 356, 357

PHONOLA 337

PILOT 396

PIONEER 325

QUASAR 325, 328

RCA/PROSCAN

325, 326, 328,

333, 335, 349,

358, 363, 397

REALISTIC 393, 397, 328,

336, 359, 362,

396, 363

SAMSUNG 354, 358, 363,

364, 365, 366

SANSUI 394

SANYO 393, 336, 367

SCHNEIDER 337

SCOTT 399, 335, 336,

348, 359, 354, 358

SELECO 322

SHARP 395, 362, 382

SIEMENS 393

SIGNATURE 2000

395, 397

SONY 368, 379, 372,

373, 374, 375

SYLVANIA 397, 325, 326, 328

SYMPHONIC 397

TANDBERG 334

TANDY 39 7

TASHIRO 3 96

TATUNG 392, 394

TEAC 392, 394, 397

TECHNICS 325, 328

TEKNIKA 396

TELEFUNKUN

376, 377

THOMAS 397

THORN 393, 396

TOSHIBA 335, 389

TOTEVISION 363, 396

UNITECH 363

UNIVERSUM 396, 327, 376

VIDEOSONIC 363

W.WHOUSE 396

WARDS 395, 396, 336,

362, 397, 363

YAMAHA 399, 392, 393, 394

ZERITH 344, 361, 368,

371, 379, 396, 397

CABLE TV TUNER

ABC 739, 752, 753,

755, 758, 759, 762

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

722

HAMIN 723, 724, 725,

726, 727

HITACHI 722

JEROLD 722, 728, 729,

732, 733, 734,

735, 736, 737

MAGNAVOX 738

MOTOROLA 748

OAK 739, 742, 743

PANASONIC 744, 745, 746,

747, 783, 784

PHILLIPS 763, 764, 765,

766, 767, 768

PIONEER 748, 785, 747

RADIO SHACK749

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

752, 753, 754

SONY 756, 757

TOCOM 755

UNIVERSAL 769, 772, 773,

774, 775

VIEWSTAR 764, 766, 776,

777, 778, 779, 782

SATELLITE TUNER

ECHOSTAR 822

GE 837, 838, 839

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

823

HITACHI 824

HUGHES 843, 844, 845, 846

JVC 822

MAGNAVOX 825

PANASONIC 826, 829

PHILLIPS 825, 843, 844,

845, 846, 847,

848, 849

PRIMESTAR 827

PROSCAN 837, 838, 839, 842

RADIO SHACK

828

RCA 837, 838, 839, 842

SAMSUNG 852

SONY 832, 835

TOSHIBA 833, 836

UNIDEN 825

ZENITH 834

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia WH83010

YSP-900

Digital Sound Projector

Système Acoustique Numérique

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

YSP-900_E-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 11, 2006 2:46 PM

Connect external component such as a TV or DVD player to this unit.

Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. Connecting a subwoofer enhances bass sound for listening enjoyment.

For further information on connecting other components, see pages 14 to 20 in the Owner’s Manual.

QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE

Decide where to install this unit.

Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired

surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner.

Connecting external components to this unit

Installing this unit

When installing this unit under your TV, place it in a

TV cabinet as shown below.

Make sure that the cabinet is large enough to allow

adequate ventilation space around this unit.

To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit

on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor.

When installing this unit above your TV, place it on

the top panel of a commercially available rack as

shown below.

Make sure that the top panel of the rack is wide and

stable enough to support the weight of this unit.

This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the

surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Install this unit either above or under your TV.

Please read the following for reference. For further information on installation, see pages 11 to 13 in the Owner’s Manual.

Make sure you use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit (see page 13 in the Owner’s

Manual).

Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is

measured from the left and right corners.

Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from

the adjacent walls.

40˚ to 50˚

An object, such as furniture

More than

1.8 m (6.0 ft)

Within 1 m (3.3 ft)

upper or lower

from the center

Optimizer

microphone

Cardboard

microphone

stand

Sofa

Place the optimizer microphone on the extended center

line of this unit and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from it.

Also, make sure place the optimizer microphone within

1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this

unit.

Optimizer

microphone

Center line

Setting up the listening environment automatically

Connect the optimizer microphone to this unit.

You can automatically adjust the various channel settings that best match your listening environment using the supplied optimizer microphone. Follow the procedure

below to connect the optimizer microphone to this unit and place it in a proper location.

Set the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position. Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated.

Assemble the cardboard microphone stand and place the

optimizer microphone on the top of the stand.

Optimizer microphone (supplied)

Cardboard microphone stand (supplied)

If you have set the optimizer microphone,

follow the steps on the backside to start

the AUTO SETUP procedure.

Continued

on the back

Connect the optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Printed in Malaysia WH90310

Coaxial

digital

output

Optical

digital

output

Analog

audio

output

Video

output

Video

input

VCR

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUDIO INPUT OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB VIDEO AUX DVD

COAXIAL

Monaural

input

DVD playerTV

This unit

To the AC outlet

Subwoofer

If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the

power of your subwoofer and then carry out the

AUTO SETUP procedure (see the backside) or

select “SWFR” for “BASS OUT” in “SUBWOOFER

SET” (see page 63 in the Owner’s Manual).

Cables used for connections

Connect cables in the following order.

1 Audio pin cable (supplied)

2 Optical cable (supplied)

3 OSD (On-Screen Display) video pin cable (supplied)

4 Digital audio pin cable (supplied)

5 DVD video pin cable

6 Subwoofer pin cable (in case you connect a subwoofer)

Do not plug the power supply cable into a wall

outlet until all connections are complete.

Unplug the power supply cable before changing

connections, moving or cleaning this unit.

English

Check the following points.

Is the optimizer microphone firmly connected to this unit?

Is the optimizer microphone placed in a proper loacation?

Are there any large obstacles in between the optimizer microphone and the

walls in your listening room?

The AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds after pressing ENTER

on step 7. To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself for your

listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed.

To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started, press RETURN.

The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes.

Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure.

The following screen appears on the TV and the AUTO SETUP procedure

starts in 10 seconds.

The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO SETUP

procedure.

If any error occurs, the corresponding error message appears on the screen.

In this case, see “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 33 in the

Owner’s Manual and then follow the instructions. To start the AUTO SETUP

procedure once again, press RETURN and then carry out the procedure from

step 5.

When the AUTO SETUP procedure is complete, the following screen

appears on the TV.

This is an example of the result screen.

The result may differ depending on the

environment.

Press ENTER.

The result is confirmed and the following screen appears on the TV for 2

seconds and then the menu screen disappears from the TV.

The new settings are automatically saved in the system memory.

Disconnect the optimizer microphone and keep it in a safe place.

Enjoy TV or DVD audio in surround sound.

For instructions on your TV or DVD player, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component.

Before carrying out the procedure below, set the volume of this unit to 30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in

step 4.

Enjoying surround sound

Carry out the AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) procedure to adjust the settings that

best match your listening environment.

This unit employs the YAMAHA IntelliBeam technology with the aid of the supplied optimizer microphone, allowing you to achieve highly accurate sound adjustments

that best match your listening environment. Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are

no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress.

Press STANDBY/ON on

the remote control.

The power of this unit turns on.

If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and

crossover/high cut frequency controls is

connected to this unit, set the volume

between 10 and 12 o’clock as viewed on

a conventional clockface and set the

crossover/high cut frequency to the

maximum.

Turn on the power of your TV.

Select the appropriate video input

on your TV.

Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

Press and hold AUTO SETUP for more than 2

seconds.

The menu screen appears on the TV.

If the menu screen does not appear, check the video pin cable (connection

3 in the diagram on the front page) is connected properly and then press

YSP followed by MENU.

If you hear sound output from your TV speakers, turn down the volume level

until you cannot hear any sound.

Use the remote control supplied with your TV.

Press VOLUME +/– on the remote control to adjust

the volume level of this unit.

Press one of the beam mode buttons on the

remote control to select the desired beam mode.

Select one of the three beam modes that best matches the current input source of

this unit.

For further information on the beam modes, see page 40 in the Owner’s Manual.

To fine-tune the listening environment parameters manually or make advanced settings for

speaker positions, sound beams, etc., see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 57 in the Owner’s Manual.

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

STEREO

MY BEAM SURROUND

SPORTS

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

213

789

PREPARATION & CHECK

Please connect the MIC.

Please place the MIC at least

1.8m/6ft away from the YSP

unit. The MIC should be set

at ear level when seated.

Measurement takes about 3min.

After [ENTER] is pressed,

please leave the room.

[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP

INPUT2

213

SLEEP

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

STB VCR DVD

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

Will begin in 10sec

Please leave the room

**--------

[RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP START

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Please remove the MIC from

the YSP and the listening

position.

POWER

STANDBY/ON

AUXSTB VCR DVD

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUBWOOFER:NOT APPLICABLE

[ENTER]:Save set-up.

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.

SHOW RESULT

Select the TV channel using

the remote control supplied

with your TV.

INPUT2

SLEEPVOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

INPUT2

SLEEPVOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

STB VCR DVD

Select the DVD video input on your

TV.

Enjoying TV in surround sound

Enjoying DVDs in surround sound

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

Continued

from the front

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

Set the operation mode selector to YSP .

Press TV on the remote

control of this unit.

This unit switches to the TV playback mode.

Press DVD on the remote control of this unit,

and then start playback on the DVD player.

This unit switches to the DVD playback mode.

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

Printed in Malaysia WJ02600

Coaxial

digital

output

Optical

digital

output

Analog

audio

output

Video

output

Video

input

VCR

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUDIO INPUT OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB VIDEO AUX DVD

COAXIAL

Monaural

input

Connectez les appareils externes tels qu’un poste de télévision ou un lecteur de DVD a l’appareil.

Pour la connexion, utilisez les câbles adaptés (voir ci-dessous). En connectant un caisson de graves, vous apprécierez mieux encore le rendu des graves.

Pour de plus amples informations sur la connexion d’autres appareils, reportez-vous aux pages 14 à 20 du Mode d’emploi.

GUIDE DE REFERENCE RAPIDE

Lecteur de DVD

Choisissez l’emplacement de l’appareil.

Installez l’appareil à un endroit où des meubles ou d’autres objects ne risquent pas de faire obstacle aux faisceaux sonores émis. Sinon, vous

n’obtiendrez pas les affects d’ambiance souhaités. Vous pouvez installer cet appareil parallèment à un mur ou dans un angle de la piece.

L’appareil

Connexion des appareils externes

Installation de l’appareil

Si vous installez l’appareil sous votre poste de télévision,

placez-le dans un meubleTV comme ci-dessous.

Assurez-vous que le meuble est assez grand pour

garantir l’a

ration autour de l’appareil.

Pour obtenir un meilleur son surround, placez

l’appareil sur la dernière étagère, le plus loin

possible du sol.

Si vous installez l’appareil au-dessus de votre poste de

télévision, placez-le sur la planche supérieure d’un

meuble vendu dans le commerce (voir ci-dessous).

Assurez-vous que la planche sup

rieure du meuble

est suffisamment large et stable pour supporter le

poids de l’appareil.

Ce guide de référence vous explique comment procéder pour connecter une télévision ou un lecteur

de DVD à cet appreil afin d’obtenir rapidement le son surround que vous recherchez. Pour le détail des

fonctions, veuillez vous reporter au Mode d’emploi.

Installez l’appareil au-dessus ou en dessous de votre poste

de télévision.

Veuillez lire attentivement ce qui suit. Pour de plus amples informations sur l’installation, reportez-vous aux pages 11 et 13 du Mode d’emploi.

Veuillez à utiliser les fixations fournies pour éviter toute chute accidentelle de l’apprareil (voir page 13 du Mode d’emploi).

Installez cet appareil au centre du mur dans le sens

de la longueur.

Installez cet appareil dans un angle du mur à 40˚ à

50˚ des murs adjacents.

40˚ à 50˚

Un objet, par exemple un meuble Un objet, par exemple un meuble

A une prise

secteur

Caisson de graves

Plus de

1,8 m

À moins de 1 m

verticalement de part et

d’autre de l’axe de l’appareil

Microphone

optimiseur

Support de

microphone

plat

Fauteuil

Posez le microphone d’optimisation dans l’axe horizontal

de cet appareil à au moins 1,8 m de l’appareil. Le

microphone devrait être posé à moins de 1 m

verticalement de l’axe de l’appareil.

Si un caisson de graves est connecté à l’appareil,

mettez votre caisson de graves sous tension et

exécutez la procédure AUTO SETUP (voir au verso) ou

sélectionnez “SWFR” pour “BASS OUT” dans

“SUBWOOFER SET” (voir page 63 du Mode d’emploi).

Miccrophone

optimiseur

Axe

Câbles utilisés pour les raccordements

Connectez les câbles en respectant l’ordre suivant.

1 Câble audio à broche (fourni)

Câble à fibres optiques

(fourni)

3 Câble vidéo pour affichage sur l’écran (OSD) (fourni)

4 Câble audionumerique à broche (fourni)

5 Câble vidéo à broche

Câble à fiches pour le caisson de graves

(si vous en connectez un)

Réglage automatique de l’ambiance d’écoute

Connectez le microphone d’optimisation à l’appareil.

Vous pouvez ajuster automatiquement les réglages des canaux avec le microphone d’optimisation fourni pour harmoniser au mieux votre ambiance d’écoute. Pour

connecter le microphone d’optimisation à l’appareil et le placer au bon endroit, suivez la procédure suivante.

Réglez le microphone à votre niveau d’écoute normal. Utilisez le support de micro fourni ou un trépied ou placez le microphone à la

même hauteur que vos oreilles lorsque vous êtes assis.

Montez le support en carton et posez le microphone

d’optimisation dessus.

Microphone optimiseur (fourni)

Support de microphone plat (fourni)

Une fois le microphone d’optimisation réglé,

suivez les indications fournies au verso pour

lancer la procédure AUTO SETUP.

Suite

au verso

Raccordez le microphone d’optimisation à la prise OPTIMIZER MIC sur la face avant.

Ne branchez le cordon d’alimentation sur une

prise secteur que lorsque tous les autres

raccordements ont été effectués.

Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation avant de

changer les raccordements, de déplacer ou de

nettoyer l’appareil.

Français

ATTENTION

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

STEREO

MY BEAM SURROUND

SPORTS

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

213

789

INPUT2

213

SLEEP

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

STB VCR DVD

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

automatique

Debut du reglage dans

10 sec.

SVP sortez de la piece

**--------

[RETURN]:Annulation

Demarrage reglage

Installation Auto effectuee

SVP retirez le micro de

l' YSP et de la position

d'ecoute

POWER

STANDBY/ON

AUXSTB VCR DVD

Mesures effectuees

Mode faisceaux:5 Beam

Subwoofer:Pas applicable

[ENTER]:Enregistrer

les reglages

[RETURN]:Ne pas enregistrer

les reglages

Affichage resultat

INPUT2

SLEEPVOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

INPUT2

SLEEPVOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

STB VCR DVD

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

Regardez la télévision ou un DVD audio en profitant du son surround.

Pour les instructions sur votre poste de télévision ou lecteur de DVD, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi fourni avec chaque

appareil.

Avant de passer à la procédure ci-dessous, réglez le volume de l’appareil sur 30. S’ll le faut, réglez le volume à l’étape 4.

Utilisation du son d’ambiance

Pour définir les réglages les mieux adaptés à votre ambiance d’écoute, lancez

la procédure AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).

Cet appareil qui bénéficie de la technologie intelliBeam de Yamaha avec microphone d’optimisation inclus, vous permet des réglages sonores d’une extrême précision,

en parfaite harmonie avec votre ambiance d’écoute. Sachez qu’il est normal que les sons d’essai puissants soient restitués pendant la procédure AUTO SETUP.

Faites

en sorte qu’il n’y ait pas d’enfants dans la pi

ce pendant le d

roulement de la proc

dure AUTO SETUP.

Si vous entendez des sons sortir des haut-parleurs de votre télé, baissez le

volume jusqu’à ce que vous n’entendiez plus rien.

Utilisez le boîtier de télécommande fourni avec le téléviseur.

Pour régler le volume de l’appareil, appuyez sur la

touche VOLUME +/

de la télécommande.

Appuyez sur l’un des boutons de mode faisceau de

la télécommande pour sélectionner le mode

faisceau souhaité.

Parmi les trois modes de faisceau sélectionnez celui qui correspond le mieux à la

source sélectionnée sur cet appareil.

Pour de plus amples informations sur les modes faisceau, reportez-vous à la page

40 du Mode d’emploi.

Pour régler manuellement les paramétres d’écoute ou effectuer des réglages sophistiqués pour

l’emplacement des enceintes, les faisceaux sonores, etc., reportez-vous à “MANUAL SETUP” à la

page 57 du Mode d’emploi.

Sélectionnez le canal TV á

l’aide de la télécommande

fournie avec le poste de

télévision.

Sélectionnez l’entrée DVD vidéo sur

votre poste de télévision.

Écoute de la télévision avec son d’ambiance

Les DVD en son surround

Suite du recto

Réglez le sélecteur de mode de fonctionnement sur

YSP.

Sur la télécommande de

l’appareil, appuyez sur TV.

L’appareil passes en mode de lecture TV.

Sur la télécommande de l’appareil,

appuyez sur DVD, puis lancez le

mode lecture sur le lecteur de DVD.

L’appareil passe en mode de lecture des DVD.

Vérifiez les points suivants.

Est-ce que le microphone optimiseur est bien raccordé à appareil?

Est-ce que le microphone optimiseur est installé au bon endroit?

Y a-t-il de gros obstacles entre le microphone optimiseur et les murs dans

la pièce?

La procédure AUTO SETUP commence 10 secondes après que vous ayez

appuyé sur ENTER à l’étape 7. Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats

possible, restez hors de la pièce pendant toute la procédure.

Pour annuler la procédure AUTO SETUP lorsqu’elle a commencé, appuyez

sur RETURN.

La procédure AUTO SETUP dure environ 3 minutes.

Appuyez sur ENTER pour lancer la proc

dure

AUTO SETUP.

L’écran suivant apparaît sur l’ecran du téléviseur et la procédure

AUTO SETUP commence 10 secondes plus tard.

L’écran de réglage change automatiquement pendant la procédure AUTO SETUP.

En cas d’erreur, le message d’erreur correspondant apparaît sur l’écran. Si le

cas se présente, reportez-vous à “Messages d’erreur pour AUTO SETUP” à

la page 33 dans le Mode d’emploi et suivez les instructions pour résoudre le

problème. Pour redémarrer la procédure AUTO SETUP, appuyez sur

RETURN puis exécutez la procédure depuis l’étape 5.

Lorsque la procédure AUTO SETUP est terminée, l’écran suivant apparaît

sur le poste de télévision.

Ceci est un exemple d’écran de

résultats.

Le résultat peut être différent selon

l’environnement.

Appuyez sur ENTER.

Le résultat vous est confirmé et l’écran suivant apparaît sur le poste de

télévision pendant 2 secondes, puis le menu disparaît.

Les nouveaux réglages sont automatiquement sauvegardés dans la mémoire

du système. Débranchez le microphone d’optimisation et rangez-le en lieu

sûr.

Appuyez sur la touche

STANDBY/ON de la

télécommande.

L’appareil s’allume.

Si le caisson de graves raccordé à cet

appareil a des commandes de réglage du

volume et de la fréquence de transition et

de coupure des aigus, réglez le volume

entre les positions 10 et 12 heures d’une

montre et la fréquence de transition/

coupure des aigus au niveau maximal.

Allumez votre poste de télévision.

Sur votre poste de télévision, sélectionnez

l’entrée vidéo qui convient.

Réglez le sélecteur de mode de

fonctionnement sur YSP.

Appuyez au moins 2 secondes sur AUTO

SETUP.

Le menu apparaît sur le poste de télévision.

S’il n’apparaît pas, vérifiez si le câble vidéo à prise cinch (connexion 3 sur le

schéma de la première page) est bien branché, et appuyez sur YSP puis sur

MENU.

Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue indiquée dans les informations OSD en

procédant de la façon suivante.

Réglez le sélecteur de mode de fonctionnement sur YSP Appuyez sur MENU

Appuyez sur

/ pour sélectionner LANGUAGE SETUP Appuyez sur ENTER

Appuyez sur

/ pour sélectionner la langue Appuyez sur ENTER

Preparation et controle

SVP connectez le micro

SVP installer le micro a

plus de 1.8m de l' YSP

Le micro doit etre installe

au niveau du point d'ecoute

Mesures Effect. en 3min.

Apres appuyez sur ENTER

SVP quittez la piece

[ENTER]:Demar. [RETURN]:Reto

Instal. AUTO

Printed in Malaysia WJ02590

Coaxial

digital

output

Optical

digital

output

Analog

audio

output

Video

output

Video

input

VCR

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUDIO INPUT OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB VIDEO AUX DVD

COAXIAL

Monaural

input

Conexión de componentes externos como una TV o un reproductor DVD a esta unidad.

Conecte su TV o reproductor DVD a la unidad utilizando los cables adecuados, tal como se muestra en el siguiente gráfico. Conectando un subwoofer se mejora el sonido de los

bajos, para disfrutar más de la escucha. Para obtener más información sobre cómo conectar otros componentes, consulte las páginas 14 a 20 en el Manual de Instrucciones.

GUÍA RÁPIDA DE REFERENCIA

Reproductor de DVD

Decidir dónde instalar la unidad.

Instale esta unidad donde no haya obstáculos como, por ejemplo, muebles obstruyendo la trayectoria de los haces sonoros. De lo

contrario no se obtendrán los efectos de sonido surround deseados. Puede Instalar esta unidad paralela a una pared o en una esquina.

Esta unidad

Conexión de los componentes externos a esta unidad

Instalación de esta unidad

Si instala la unidad debajo de su TV, sitúela en un

mueble para TV, tal como se ilustra más abajo.

Asegúrese de que el mueble sea lo bastante ancho para

permitir una ventilación adecuada alrededor de la unidad.

Para disfrutar mejor de los efectos surround,

coloque la unidad en la estantería superior, lo más

lejos posible del suelo.

Si instala la unidad encima de su TV, colóquela en el

panel superior de una estantería, disponible en los

comercios, tal como se ilustra más abajo.

Asegúrese de que el panel superior de la estantería

sea lo bastante ancho y estable como para aguantar

el peso de la unidad.

La presente guía rápida de referencia explica los pasos a seguir para conectar una TV y un reproductor

DVD a esta unidad y conseguir los efectos de sonido surround de forma rápida y sencilla. Para detalles

sobre su funcionamiento, consultar el Manual de Instrucciones.

Instalar la unidad encima o debajo de su TV.

Sírvase leer la siguiente información de referencia. Para más información sobre la instalación, ver las páginas 11 y 13 del

Manual de Instrucciones.

Asegúrese de utilizer los elementos de fijación incluidos, para evitar que la unidad pueda caerse accidentalmente

(ver página 13 del Manual de Instrucciones).

Instale esta unidad en el centro exacto de la pared

según se mide desde las esquinas derecha e izquierda.

Instale esta unidad en una esquina a un ángulo de

40˚ a 50˚ de las paredes adyacentes.

40˚ a 50˚

Un objeto como, por ejemplo, un mueble Un objeto como, por ejemplo, un mueble

A la toma

de CA

Altavoz de

subgraves

A más de

1,8 m

Dentro de 1 m

por encima o por

debajo del centro

Micrófono

optimizador

Soporte de

cartón para

micrófono

Sofá

Ponga el micrófono optimizador sobre la línea central

extendida de esta unidad y a 1,8 m o más alejado de ella.

Además, asegúrese de colocar el micrófono optimizador

dentro de 1 m por encima o por debajo de la altura

central de esta unidad.

Si se conecta un subwoofer a esta unidad,

encender el subwoofer y a continuación efectuar

el procedimiento AJUSTE AUTOMÁTICO (ver

reverso) o seleccionar “SWFR” para “BASS OUT”

en “SUBWOOFER SET” (ver página 63 en el

Manual de Instrucciones).

Micrófono

optimizador

Línea central

Cables utilizados para las conexiones

Conectar los cables en el siguiente orden.

1 Cable de audio con clavijas (suministrado)

2 Cable óptico (suministrado)

3 Cable de vídeo OSD con clavijas (suministrado)

4 Cable de audio digital con clavijas (suministrado)

5 Cable de vídeo con clavijas

6 Cable de altavoz de subgraves (si conecta un subwoofer)

Ajuste automático del entorno de escucha

Conectar el micrófono optimizador a esta unidad.

Puede ajustar automáticamente las distintas selecciones de canales que mejor se ajusten a su entorno de escucha, utilizando el micrófono optimizador incluido. Siga el

siguiente procedimiento para conectar el micrófono optimizador a esta unidad, y colóquelo en el lugar adecuado.

Sitúe el micrófono optimizador en su posición habitual de escucha. Utilice el soporte de cartón incluido o un trípode para colocar el micrófono optimizador

a la misma altura en que estarían sus oídos cuando está sentado.

Monte el soporte de cartón y coloque encima el

micrófono optimizador.

Micrófono optimizador (suministrado)

Soporte de cartón para micrófono (suministrado)

Una vez programado el micrófono optimizador, siga

los pasos que figuran en el reverso, para iniciar el

procedimiento de AJUSTE AUTOMÁTICO.

Continúa en

el reverso

Conecte el micrófono optimizador a la toma OPTIMIZER MIC del lado izquierdo de esta unidad.

No enchufe el cable de alimentación en una

toma de corriente hasta después de finalizar

todas las conexiones.

Desenchufe el cable de alimentación antes

de cambiar conexiones, mover este aparato

o limpiarlo.

PRECAUCIÓN

Español

Compruebe los siguientes puntos.

¿Está el micrófono optimizador firmemente conectado a esta unidad?

¿Está el micrófono optimizador colocado en un lugar adecuado?

¿Hay abstáculos grandes entre el micrófono optimizador y las paredes de

su habitación de escucha?

El procedimiento AUTO SETUP empieza 10 segundos después de pulsar

ENTER en el paso 7. Para obtener los mejores resultados posibles, salga

de su sala de escucha hasta que termine el procedimiento AUTO SETUP.

Para cancelar el procedimiento AUTO SETUP después de haber

empezado, pulse RETURN.

El procedimiento AUTO SETUP tarda unos 3 minutos.

Pulse ENTER para empezar el procedimiento

AUTO SETUP.

La pantalla siguiente aparece en su TV y el procedimiento AUTO SETUP

empieza en 10 segundos.

La pantalla de configuración cambia automáticamente durante el

procedimiento AUTO SETUP.

Si se produce un error, en mensaje de error correspondiente aparece en la

pantalla. En este caso, consulte “Mensaje de error para AUTO SETUP” en la

página 33 del manual del propietario y luego siga las instrucciones. Para

iniciar de nuevo el procedimiento AUTO SETUP, pulse RETURN y luego

realice el procedimiento desde el paso 5.

Cuando termine el procedimiento AUTO SETUP aparecerá la pantalla

siguiente en el televisor.

* Éste es un ejemplo de la pantalla del

resultado. El resultado puede cambiar

dependiendo del medio ambiente.

Pulse ENTER.

El resultado se confirma y la pantalla siguiente aparece en el televisor

durante 2 segundos, y luego, la pantalla del menú desaparece de la pantalla

del televisor.

Los nuevos ajustes se guardan automáticamente en la memoria del sistema.

Desconecte el micrófono optimizador y guárdelo en un lugar seguro.

Disfrute de la TV o de un DVD audio con sonido surround.

Si necesita instrucciones sobre su TV o reproductor DVD, consulte el manual de instrucciones suministrado con cada componente.

Antes de efectuar el siguiente procedimiento, ajuste el volumen de la unidad en 30. Si fuese necesario, ajuste el nivel de volumen tal

como se describe en el paso 4.

Disfrute del sonido surround

Efectúe el procedimiento de AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) para seleccionar los

ajustes que mejor correspondan a su entorno de escucha.

Esta unidad emplea la tecnología IntelliBeam de YAMAHA que, con ayuda del micrófono optimizador incluido, le permite seleccionar con gran precisión los ajustes de

sonido que mejor correspondan a su entorno de escucha. Téngase en cuenta que es normal que se emitan tonalidades bastante fuertes de prueba, durante el

procedimiento de AUTO SETUP. Asegúrense de que no hay niños pequeños en la habitación mientras se efectúa el procedimiento de AJUSTE AUTOMÁTICO.

Presione STANDBY/ON

en el mando a distancia.

La unidad se encenderá.

Si se conecta a esta unidad un altavoz de

subgraves con controles de volumen

ajustable y control de frecuencia de cruce/

frecuencia de corte alta, ajuste el volumen

entre las 10 y las 12 en punto según se

mira un reloj convencional y ajuste la

frecuencia de cruce/frecuencia de corte alta

al máximo.

Encienda su TV.

Seleccione la entrada vídeo apropiada en su

TV.

Ponga el selector del modo de operación en YSP.

Mantenga pulsado AUTO SETUP durante más

de 2 segundos.

La pantalla del menú aparece en el televisor.

Si no aparece la pantalla del menú, compruebe que el cable con clavijas de

vídeo (conexión 3 en el diagrama de la página frontal) esté conectado

correctamente y pulse YSP seguido de MENU.

Puede seleccionar el idioma mostrado en la OSD ejecutando los pasos de abajo.

Ponga el selector del modo de operación en YSP Pulse MENU Pulse /

para seleccionar LANGUAGE SETUP Pulse ENTER Pulse / para

seleccionar el idioma Pulse ENTER

Si le llega algún sonido de los altovoces de la TV, baje el nivel de volumen

hasta que deje de oírlo.

Utilice para ello el mando a distancia de su TV.

Presione VOLUME +/– en el mando a distancia para

ajustar el volumen de esta unidad.

Presione uno de los botones de los haces de sonido en

el mando a distancia para seleccionar el modo elegido.

Seleccione uno de los tres modos de haces que mejor se adapten a la fuente de

entrada actual de esta unidad.

Para más información sobre los modos de haces de sonido, consultar la página 40 del

Manual de Instrucciones.

Para un ajuste manual de los parámetros del entorno de escucha, o para realizar ajustes

avanzados de la colocación de altavoces, haces de sonido, etc., consulte “MANUAL SETUP” en la

página 57 del Manual de Instrucciones.

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

STEREO

MY BEAM SURROUND

SPORTS

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

213

789

PREPARACION Y COMPROBACION

Por favor conectar MIC

Posicionar MIC por lo menos

a 1.8m/6ft del YSP

El MIC debe posicionarse

alaaltura del oido sentado

Medidas duraran aprox. 3min

Pulse [ENTER] y salga de sala

[ENTER]:Comenzar

[RETURN]:Cancelar

CONFIG. AUTOMATICA

INPUT2

213

SLEEP

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

STB VCR DVD

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

AUTOMATICA

COMENZAR EN 10 S.

Por favor salga de la sala

**--------

[RETURN]:Cancelar

COMIENZO CONFIG.

CONFIG. AUTOMATICA COMPLETA

Por favor quitar MIC

del YSP

POWER

STANDBY/ON

AUXSTB VCR DVD

MEDIDA COMPLETA

MODO BEAM:5 BEAM

SUBWOOFER:NO APLICABLE

[ENTER]:Almacenar config.

[RETURN]:No almacenar

config.

MOSTRAR RESULTADO

Seleccione el canal de TV

utilizando el mando a

distancia de su TV.

INPUT2

SLEEPVOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

INPUT2

SLEEPVOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

MACROINPUT1

AUX

STB VCR DVD

Seleccione la entrada de vídeo DVD

en su TV.

Para disfrutar de la TV con sonido surround

Disfrutar de DVD con sonido surround

Altavoz de subgraves

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

Continúa de

la otra cara

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

Ponga el selector de modo de funcionamiento en YSP.

Presione TV en el mando a

distancia de esta unidad.

La unidad pasa a modo de reproducción de TV.

Presione DVD en el mando a distancia

de esta unidad, y a continuación inicie

la reproducción en el reproductor DVD.

La unidad pasa al modo de reproducción DVD.

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURN

TEST

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Documenttranscriptie

YSP-900_E-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 11, 2006 2:46 PM E YSP-900 © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WH83010 YSP-900 Digital Sound Projector Système Acoustique Numérique OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 5 cm of space above (or below) this unit – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning storm. Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature changes suddenly. Disconnect the power cable from the outlet, then leave the unit alone. When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm. Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling. Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. i En WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the AC wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR U.K. CUSTOMERS If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note that the plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Make sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. CONTENTS Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound ................................................ 43 Enjoying TV in surround sound .............................. 44 Adjusting surround mode parameters...................... 45 ENJOYING STEREO SOUND ...........................46 Front panel ................................................................. 6 Front panel display .................................................... 7 Rear panel .................................................................. 8 Remote control........................................................... 9 Using auto-adjust function....................................... 47 Using manual-adjust function.................................. 48 PREPARATION INSTALLATION ................................................. 11 Before installing this unit......................................... 11 Installing this unit .................................................... 11 CONNECTIONS .................................................. 14 USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS................49 What is a sound field? ............................................. 49 Turning on CINEMA DSP programs ...................... 50 Turning off CINEMA DSP programs ..................... 51 Adjusting CINEMA DSP effect levels .................... 51 USING THE VOLUME MODE (Night listening mode/TV volume equal mode)........................................................52 USING BASS SOUND ENHANCER (TruBass)............................................................54 USING THE SLEEP TIMER ..............................55 Setting the sleep timer ............................................. 55 Canceling the sleep timer ........................................ 56 SETUP Connecting a TV...................................................... 15 Connecting a DVD player/recorder ......................... 16 Connecting a VCR................................................... 17 Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner .................................................. 18 Connecting other external components ................... 19 Connecting a subwoofer .......................................... 20 Connecting the power supply cable......................... 21 Stereo playback........................................................ 46 PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (My beam) ..........................................................47 PREPARATION OVERVIEW ........................................................... 2 FEATURES............................................................. 3 USING THIS MANUAL ........................................ 4 SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ................................. 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 6 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION ADVANCED OPERATION MANUAL SETUP.................................................57 GETTING STARTED.......................................... 22 Installing batteries in the remote control ................. 22 Operation range of the remote control..................... 22 Using the remote control ......................................... 23 Turning on the power............................................... 23 USING SET MENU.............................................. 24 ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE .............68 Using the test tone ................................................... 68 Using the audio output being played back............... 69 SELECTING THE INPUT MODE .....................71 ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS ...........72 USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY .................... 34 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................77 Convenient usage of the system memory ................ 34 Saving settings ......................................................... 34 Loading settings....................................................... 35 Setting remote control codes ................................... 77 Controlling other components ................................. 78 Using the TV macro ................................................ 80 BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 37 Selecting the input source........................................ 37 Playing back sources................................................ 38 Adjusting the volume............................................... 39 Muting the sound ..................................................... 39 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................82 GLOSSARY...........................................................85 Audio formats .......................................................... 85 Audio information ................................................... 85 INDEX....................................................................86 SPECIFICATIONS...............................................87 5 beam...................................................................... 40 Stereo plus 3 beam................................................... 41 3 beam...................................................................... 41 1 En English ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .................... 40 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The flow chart of AUTO SETUP ............................ 27 Installing the optimizer microphone........................ 28 Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)........................ 29 Using the system parameters ................................... 72 Setting the MEMORY PROTECT .......................... 72 Setting the MAX VOLUME.................................... 73 Setting the TURN ON VOLUME ........................... 74 Setting the DEMO MODE ...................................... 74 Setting the FACTORY PRESET ............................. 75 CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE ........................ 26 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ............................... 27 ADVANCED OPERATION Displaying the OSD................................................. 24 The flow chart of SET MENU................................. 25 Using MANUAL SETUP ........................................ 58 BEAM MENU ......................................................... 59 SOUND MENU....................................................... 63 INPUT MENU......................................................... 65 DISPLAY MENU.................................................... 67 BASIC OPERATION SETUP OVERVIEW OVERVIEW It is generally accepted that in order to fully enjoy the benefits of surround sound at home, you must endure the agony of wiring and installing a great number of speakers in the hope that your listening room will give you the same kind of surround sound experience as your local movie theater. YAMAHA YSP-900 Digital Sound Projector challenges this preconception that complicated speaker setup and troublesome wiring go hand-in-hand with the enjoyment of multi-channel surround sound. This slimline unit does away with the need for complicated wiring and installation worries, leaving you with a unit that is not only easy to set up, but which is also capable of reproducing the kind of powerful surround sound you have been waiting for from its built-in 2 woofers and 21 full-range small speakers. You can fine-tune the parameters of this unit to adjust the delay time for separate sound beams, resulting in highly directional sound that comes in on the listening position from all directions. The YSP-900 projects sound beams containing surround sound information for the front right (R), front left (L), surround right (SR) and surround left (SL) speaker positions, which are reflected off the walls of your listening room before reaching the actual listening position. With the addition of center (C) sound beams, this Digital Sound Projector creates true-to-life 5.1 channel surround sound that makes you feel as if there are actual speakers around the room. Sit back and enjoy the real sound experience of this simple, yet stylish Digital Sound Projector. Imaginary front right speaker R C SR L SL Imaginary surround right speaker Imaginary front left speaker Imaginary center speaker Listening position Imaginary surround left speaker 2 En FEATURES FEATURES My beam This unit employs the my beam so that you can achieve a clear sound in noisy environment. You can adjust the beam angle manually or automatically using the supplied remote control. Cinema DSP Digital This unit employs the Cinema DSP Digital technology developed by YAMAHA Electronics Corp. so that you can experience movies at home with all the dramatic sound impact that the director intended to convey. Versatile Remote Control The supplied remote control come with preset remote control codes to be used to control the DVD player, VCR, cable TV tuner and digital satellite tuner connected to this unit. In addition, the remote control is equipped with the macro capability so that you can perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of YAMAHA Corporation. The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered trademarks of YAMAHA Corporation. AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic optimization technology with the aid of the supplied optimizer microphone so that you can avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate sound beam adjustments that best match your listening environment. INTRODUCTION Digital Sound Projector This unit employs the digital sound projector technology that allows one slim unit to control and steer multiple channels of sound to generate multi channel surround sound, thus eliminating the need for satellite loudspeakers and cabling normally associated with conventional surround sound systems. This unit is also equipped with the following beam modes so that you can enjoy the surround sound. ◆ 5 beam ◆ Stereo plus 3 beam ◆ 3 beam This unit also employs the stereo playback and my beam. Compatibility with the Newest Technologies This unit employs decoders compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS (Digital Theater Systems), Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II and DTS Neo:6. ◆ Dolby Digital This is the standard audio signal format used on DVDs and other purely digital media. This surround technology deliver high-quality digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more realistic effect. ◆ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) This is an audio signal format used on DVDs and other purely digital media. This surround technology deliver high-quality digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more realistic effect. ◆ Dolby Pro Logic This sophisticated, matrix decoding technology up-converts any 2 channel source audio to a 5.1 channel full bandwidth playback, resulting in a surround sound experience. ◆ Dolby Pro Logic II This is fundamentally a redesigned version of Dolby Pro Logic that employs 2 stereo surround channels, a subwoofer and a greatly enhanced steering logic. As a result, this improved technology provides an exceptionally stable sound field that simulates 5.1 to a much greater degree than the original Dolby Pro Logic. In addition, Dolby Pro Logic II features Movie, Music and Game modes specifically designed for movies, music and games respectively. ◆ DTS Neo:6 This technology decodes the conventional 2 channel sources for 6 channel playback, enabling playback with the full-range channels with higher separation. Music mode and Cinema mode are available to play back music and movie sources respectively. “DTS” and “Neo:6” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Manufactured under license from 1 Ltd. Worldwide patents applied for. The “ ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector™” are trademarks of 1 Ltd. TruBass, SRS and the “ ” symbol are registered trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TruBass technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. 3 En English Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. USING THIS MANUAL USING THIS MANUAL Notes • This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the supplied owner’s manual for the component. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In such cases, the operation is described using remote control operation. • y indicates a tip for your operation. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. 1 Install this unit in your listening room. See “INSTALLATION” on page 11. 2 Connect this unit to your TV and other external components. See “CONNECTIONS” on page 14. 3 Prepare the remote control and turn on the power of this unit. See “GETTING STARTED” on page 22. 4 Run AUTO SETUP. See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 27. 5 Play back a source. See “PLAYBACK” on page 37. 6 Change the beam modes and/or CINEMA DSP settings. See “ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND” on page 40. If you want to make additional settings and adjustments 7 Run MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune settings and/or set remote control codes. See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 57 and “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 77. 4 En SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES Remote control (×1) Optical cable (×1) POWER POWER STANDBY/ON AV STB Batteries (×2) (AA, R6, UM-3) INTRODUCTION Check that you have received all of the following parts. TV VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM OSD video pin cable (×1) 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 (Yellow) OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL Digital audio pin cable (×1) 3BEAM (Orange) MENU TV/AV Optimizer microphone (×1) Audio pin cable (×1) ENTER YSP RETURN TEST VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL (White/Red) TV MUTE CODE SET Cable clamp (×1) Fasteners (×4) Cardboard microphone stand (×1) English 5 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 4 5 INPUT VOLUME 1 OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect the supplied optimizer microphone to be used to run AUTO SETUP (see page 28). 2 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 3 Remote control sensor Receives infrared signals from the remote control. 4 INPUT Press repeatedly to switch between input sources (TV, STB, VCR, DVD or AUX). See page 37 for details. Outputs a test tone to experience the sound beam (see page 68). 5 VOLUME –/+ Controls the volume level of all audio channels (see page 39). 6 En 3 6 + STANDBY/ON 6 STANDBY/ON Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode (see page 23). Notes • When you turn on the power of this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before it can reproduce sound. • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 2 NIGHT SLEEP 3 PCM INTRODUCTION 1 4 DIGITAL PL VOL m ft mS dB 5 1 NIGHT indicator Lights up when one of the night listening modes is selected (see page 52). 2 SLEEP indicator Lights up when the sleep timer is turned on (see page 55). 3 Decoder indicators Light up when the corresponding decoder of this unit is in operation (see page 42). 4 Volume level indicator Shows the current volume level (see page 39). 5 Multi-information display Shows information when you adjust the parameters of this unit. y You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display using the DISPLAY MENU parameters in MANUAL SETUP (see page 67). English 7 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 8 1 VCR 2 TV/STB AUDIO INPUT 3 4 SUBWOOFER VIDEO OUT 5 (Europe model) 6 AUX TV/STB OPTICAL 7 DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT 1 VCR analog audio input jacks Use to make an analog connection to your VCR (see page 17). 6 AUX OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Use to connect an external component via an optical digital connection (see page 19). 2 TV/STB analog audio input jacks Use to make an analog connection to your TV, digital satellite tuner and cable TV tuner (see pages 15 and 18). 7 DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Use to connect a DVD player via a coaxial digital connection (see page 16). 3 SUBWOOFER OUT jack Use to connect a subwoofer (see page 20). 8 AC power supply cable Use to connect to the AC wall outlet (see page 21). 4 VIDEO OUT jack Use to connect to the video input terminal of your TV to display the OSD of this unit (see page 15). 5 TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Use to connect a TV, digital satellite tuner and cable TV tuner via an optical digital connection (see pages 15 and 18). 8 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control y You can also control other components using the remote control once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See “Controlling other components” on page 78 for details. POWER POWER STANDBY/ON AV TV 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 STANDBY/ON Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 23). 3 Transmission indicator Lights up when infrared control signals are being output. INTRODUCTION The functions of some buttons change depending on the position of the operation mode selector (S). This section basically describes the functions of the remote control used to control this unit. 4 Input selector buttons Use to select an input source (STB, VCR, DVD, AUX or TV). Use to change the control area of the remote control. (S: TV/AV) 5 VOL MODE Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 52). STB VCR DVD INPUT1 AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO 7 Numeric buttons Use to enter numbers. (S: TV/AV) MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 6 AUTO SETUP Use to enter the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 27). +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE CODE SET 8 STEREO Use the playback sources in 2-channel stereo (see page 46). 9 Sound field program buttons Use to select sound field programs (see page 49). 0 CH LEVEL Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 69). A Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER Use to select and adjust SET MENU items. Use to select DVD menu items. (S: TV/AV) B TEST Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each speaker (see page 68). C VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see page 39). D MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 39). E TV INPUT Switches the input source or the TV (see page 78). G My beam microphone Use to collect the test tones from this unit when using the my beam auto-adjust function (see page 48). 9 En English F DVD player/VCR control buttons Use to control the DVD player or the VCR (see pages 78 and 79). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS H TV POWER Turns on the power of the TV or sets it to the standby mode (see page 78). I AV POWER Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to the standby mode (see pages 78 and 79). J INPUT1/INPUT2 Selects the input source of the TV (see page 78). K MACRO Use to set the TV macro (see page 80). L SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 55). M INPUTMODE Switches between input modes (AUTO, DTS or ANALOG). See page 71 for details. N Beam mode buttons Change the beam mode settings (see pages 40, 46 and 47). O SURROUND Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 40). P MY BEAM Use to select the my beam as the beam mode (see page 48). Q TruBass Use to effectively reproduce the bass sound (see page 54). R MENU Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see pages 29 and 58). Displays the DVD menu. (S: TV/AV) S Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating the TV or other AV components set up the appropriate remote control codes. T RETURN Use to select sleep timer settings or return to the previous SET MENU screen. Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit the DVD menu. (S: TV/AV) U TV VOL +/– Adjusts the volume level of the TV (see page 78). V CH +/– Switches between channels of the TV or the VCR (see pages 78 and 79). W TV MUTE, CODE SET Mutes the audio output of the TV (see page 78). Use to set up remote control codes (see page 77). 10 En INSTALLATION INSTALLATION This section describes a suitable installation location to install the unit using a metal wall bracket, a rack or a stand. Before installing this unit Install this unit where there are no obstacles such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. Parallel installation Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. PREPARATION This unit creates surround sound by reflecting projected sound beams off the walls of your listening room. The surround sound effects produced by this unit may not be sufficient when the unit is installed in the following locations. • Rooms with surfaces inadequate for reflecting sound beams • Rooms with acoustically absorbent surfaces • Rooms with measurements outside the following range W (3 to 7 m) x H (2 to 3.5 m) x D (3 to 7 m) • Rooms with less than 1.8 m from the listening position to the speaker positions • Rooms where objects such as furniture are likely to obstruct the path of sound beams • Rooms where the listening position is close to the walls • Rooms where the listening position is not in front of this unit Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation space so that heat can escape. Make at least 5 cm of space above or below this unit. Installing this unit An object, such as furniture Side view 5 cm or more Corner installation Install this unit in the corner at a 40º to 50º angle from the adjacent walls. 40° to 50° Front Rear Notes An object, such as furniture English • We do not recommend installing this unit so that it is positioned directly on the floor of your listening room. Please install this unit using a metal wall bracket, rack or stand. • This unit weighs 9.0 kg. Be sure to install this unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children. • When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this unit directly above your TV. • This unit is shielded against magnetic rays. However, if the picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we recommend moving the speakers away from your TV. 11 En INSTALLATION ■ Installation examples Example 1 Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible. Example 2 Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls. Example 3 Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position. 12 En INSTALLATION ■ Using a metal wall bracket ■ Using a rack You can use the optional metal wall bracket to mount this unit on the wall in your listening room. You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a commercially available rack. Metal wall bracket When this unit is installed above your TV This unit PREPARATION TV y Refer to the instructions supplied with the metal bracket for details on how to attach the metal bracket to the wall or how to attach this unit to the metal bracket. ■ Using a stand You can mount your TV on the stand placed on a commercially available rack to install this unit under your TV. Stand When this unit is installed under your TV Note Make sure that the rack is large enough to allow adequate ventilation space around this unit (see page 11) and that it is strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV. ■ Affixing this unit TV Peel off the film from each of the four supplied fasteners and then secure them to the bottom four corners of this unit and the top of the rack, etc. This unit This unit y Peel off 2 the film Refer to the instructions supplied with the stand for details on how to install the stand or how to mount this unit and the TV on the stand. 1 Fasteners Notes • Do not install this unit on top of a slanted surface. This unit may fall over and cause injury. • Make sure you wipe the surface of the rack, etc. before securing the fasteners. Applying the tape to a dirty or wet surface will weaken the sticking power of the tape, and this unit may fall as a result. English 13 En CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS This unit is equipped with two optical digital jacks, one coaxial digital jack and two types of analog jacks for connecting external components such as your TV, DVD player, VCR, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner and game console. Further, by connecting a subwoofer to this unit, you can enjoy reinforced low bass sounds. For details on how to connect various types of external components to this unit, see pages 15 to 20. CAUTION • Do not connect this unit or other components to the main power until all connections between components are complete. • Unplug the power supply cable before changing connections, moving or cleaning this unit. Audio connection Video connection TV This unit DVD player Subwoofer VCR To prevent cables from becoming unplugged, place the supplied cable clamp with the open side facing upward, attach it to the rear panel of this unit in a suitable position and then affix cables in the cable clamp. 14 En Digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner or game console Optical fiber cable Attach to this unit CONNECTIONS Connecting a TV You can connect a TV to this unit and display the OSD for easy viewing when you adjust the system parameters in SET MENU. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 14). Note If you connect this unit to the analog audio and optical digital audio output jacks at the same time as shown in the left illustration below, the digital audio signals output at the optical digital output jack take priority over the analog audio signals output at the analog audio output jacks. ■ Video connections TV TV Analog audio output R PREPARATION ■ Digital and analog audio connections Optical digital output Video input L Remove the caps if attached Check the direction Rear panel of this unit VCR TV/STB AUDIO INPUT SUBWOOFER VIDEO OUT AUX TV/STB OPTICAL Rear panel of this unit VCR DVD COAXIAL TV/STB AUDIO INPUT DIGITAL INPUT Cables used for connections OUT AUX TV/STB OPTICAL DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT Cables used for connections Audio pin cable (White) SUBWOOFER VIDEO OSD video pin cable (supplied) (White) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Red) (Red) Optical cable (supplied) English 15 En CONNECTIONS Connecting a DVD player/recorder To connect a DVD player/recorder, connect the coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player to the coaxial digital input jack (DVD COAXIAL) on this unit. If there is no coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player/recorder, use them with optical digital connection. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 14). Notes • Check that your DVD player/recorder is properly set to output Dolby Digital and DTS digital audio signals. If not, adjust the system settings of your DVD player/recorder. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your DVD player/recorder. • If your DVD player/recorder does not have a coaxial digital output jack, make an optical digital audio connection instead. DVD/VCR combo player/recorder DVD player/recorder Video signal to a TV Video signal to a TV Analog audio output R Coaxial digital output Coaxial digital output L Rear panel of this unit VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER VIDEO AUDIO INPUT TV/STB AUX OPTICAL OUT DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT Cables used for connections Digital audio pin cable (supplied) Audio pin cable (White) (Orange) (Red) 16 En (White) (Orange) (Red) CONNECTIONS Connecting a VCR To connect a VCR, connect the analog audio output jacks on your VCR to the analog audio input jacks (VCR R/L) on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VCR Video signal to a TV PREPARATION Analog audio output R L Rear panel of this unit VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER VIDEO AUDIO INPUT TV/STB AUX OPTICAL OUT DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT Cables used for connections Audio pin cable (White) (Red) (White) (Red) English 17 En CONNECTIONS Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner To connect a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner, connect the optical digital output jack on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the optical digital input jack (TV/STB OPTICAL) on this unit. In addition, connect the analog audio output jacks on your VCR to the analog audio input jacks (TV/STB R/L) on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 14). Note If your TV and tuner connected to this unit do not support digital broadcasting, connect the analog audio output jacks (TV/STB R/L) on this unit to the analog audio output jacks on your TV. TV Digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner Video signal to a TV Analog audio output Analog audio output R R L Optical digital output L Rear panel of this unit VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER VIDEO AUDIO INPUT OUT TV/STB AUX OPTICAL DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT Cables used for connections Optical cable (supplied) Audio pin cable (White) (Red) 18 En (White) (Red) CONNECTIONS Connecting other external components To connect other external components, connect the optical digital output jack on the component to the optical digital input jack (AUX OPTICAL) on this unit. You can connect a DVD player/recorder or a component that supports optical digital connections. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 14). Game console, etc. PREPARATION Video signal to a TV Optical digital output Rear panel of this unit VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER VIDEO AUDIO INPUT OUT TV/STB AUX OPTICAL DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT Cables used for connections Optical cable (supplied) English 19 En CONNECTIONS Connecting a subwoofer To connect a subwoofer, connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the monaural audio output jack (SUBWOOFER OUT) on this unit. No sound will be output from a subwoofer when only this connection has been made. To output sounds from a subwoofer, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then run AUTO SETUP (see page 27) or select SWFR for BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET (see page 63). Subwoofer Monaural input Rear panel of this unit VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER VIDEO AUDIO INPUT OUT TV/STB AUX OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT Cables used for connections Subwoofer pin cable 20 En DVD COAXIAL CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cable Once all other connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC wall outlet. PREPARATION To the AC outlet English 21 En GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED Installing batteries in the remote control y Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote control. Press Operation range of the remote control You can control other components by setting the appropriate 1 Press and hold the mark on the battery cover and then slide off the cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) into the battery compartment. Make sure you insert the batteries according to the polarity markings (+/–). 3 Close the battery cover. The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Use the remote control within 6 m of this unit and point it toward the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. Approximately 6m Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions; the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not blink or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • Exhausted batteries may leak. If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste. Dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • The contents of the memory stored in the remote control may be erased in the following cases: – The remote control is left without batteries for more than 2 minutes. – Exhausted batteries remain in the remote control. – The buttons on the remote control are accidentally pressed when you change batteries. • If the memory stored in the remote control is unwantedly erased, insert new batteries and reset the remote control codes again. 22 En Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or a stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • Do not expose the remote control sensor on this unit to direct sunlight or lighting such as inverted fluorescent lamps. • If the batteries grow old, the effective operation distance of the remote control decreases considerably. If this happens, replace the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible. GETTING STARTED Using the remote control Turning on the power This section describes how to control this unit using the supplied remote control. The functions of the remote control change depending on the position of the operation mode selector. Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. The buttons on the remote control numbered 1 to 4 are operational only when you select YSP. Also, functions of the buttons numbered 5 to 9 vary depending on the position of the operation mode selector. The corresponding functions of the buttons, see page 9. y VOLUME + STANDBY/ON You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes (see page 77). Once the remote control code for each input source (DVD, VCR, STB, TV or AUX) is set, see “Controlling other components” on page 78 for further information on the specific functions of the available remote control buttons for each input source. POWER POWER STANDBY/ON Operational buttons only when YSP is selected STB VCR TV DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO SETUP INPUT1 AV TV STB VCR DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO INPUT1 TV 1 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 2 3 1 STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF CH LEVEL Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control to turn on the power of this unit. The volume level appears in the front panel display and then the input source and beam mode currently selected are displayed. 4 +10 0 2 1 AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP MENU or TV/AV STANDBY/ON ENTER YSP 3 Front panel RETURN TEST VOLUME TV VOL CH 2 Function-varying buttons 5 STB VCR DVD INPUT1 Note TV 1 6 STEREO Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control again to set this unit to the standby mode. AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM Remote control ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 2 3 When the unit is in the standby mode, only STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control is operational, and the other control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control are not operational until the power of this unit is turned on. MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL 8 English 7 MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST VOLUME CH 9 TV VOL 23 En USING SET MENU USING SET MENU Displaying the OSD This section simply describes how to display the OSD (on-screen display) of this unit on your TV screen and set the parameters for your listening room. Once this is complete, you can enjoy real surround sound while watching TV in the comfort of your own home. 1 Check that the video input jack on your TV is connected to the VIDEO OUT jack of this unit to display the OSD of this unit. 2 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control to turn on the power of this unit. or 3 Turn on the power of your TV. The following screen appears on your TV. YSP-900 Push [MENU] to begin set-up OSD screen example STANDBY/ON Front panel 24 En Remote control If the OSD does not appear, use the remote control provided with your TV to switch the video input until the OSD appears. USING SET MENU The flow chart of SET MENU The following diagram illustrates the overall flow of the setup procedure. Run LANGUAGE SETUP. See “CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE” on page 26. Run AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam). See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 27. If an error occurs SETUP Look for a remedy. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 33 for a complete list of error messages and possible remedies. Play back audio signals or adjust the settings for the beam mode and the CINEMA DSP. See “PLAYBACK” on page 37. If you want to make additional settings and adjustments Run MANUAL SETUP. See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 57. y • If you cannot clearly hear a sound beam from a specific channel, adjust settings for SETTING PARAMETERS (see page 59) or for BEAM ADJUSTMENT (see page 60) in BEAM MENU. • If there are acoustically absorbent objects such as curtains in the path of the sound beams, adjust settings for TREBLE GAIN in BEAM MENU (see page 62). English 25 En CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language of your choice that appears in the SET MENU of this unit. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. 4 Press / to select the language and then press ENTER. TV/AV YSP ENTER 2 Press MENU on the remote control. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed on the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN on the remote control. • To cancel the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 3 ENTER Press / to select LANGUAGE SETUP and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER LANGUAGE SETUP 26 En p p . ENGLISH DEUTSCH Francais ESPANOL [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German), Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish) AUTO SETUP (INTELLIBEAM) AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams on the walls of your listening room and broadening the cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit. This unit employs the beam optimization and sound optimization features with the aid of the supplied optimizer microphone, allowing you to avoid troublesome listening-based setup and achieving highly accurate sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. We call these 2 features “IntelliBeam” generically. The beam optimization creates the best possible surround sound field without manually setting the parameters for your listening room. The sound optimization feature performs the following checks and automatically makes appropriate sound adjustments. DISTANCE: Checks the distance of each beam from this unit and adjusts the delay of each channel so that each sound beam reaches the listening position at the same time. EQUALIZING: Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. The sound optimization feature incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. SETUP LEVEL: Checks and adjusts the sound output level of each channel. The flow chart of AUTO SETUP This unit performs a series of checks to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume and quality. You can choose to optimize all or part of the parameters. Notes Checking the environment of your listening room *1 Optimizing the beam angle Beam optimization *1 The beam angle checking procedure is skipped if SOUND OPTIMZ only is selected. *2 The sound optimization procedure is skipped if BEAM OPTIMZ only is selected. *3 The subwoofer checking procedure is skipped if BEAM OPTIMZ only is selected. *2 *3 Checking the subwoofer Optimizing the beam delay, frequency and volume Sound optimization English 27 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Installing the optimizer microphone The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound that this unit produces in your actual listening environment. Follow the procedure below to connect the optimizer microphone to this unit and make sure that the optimizer microphone is placed in a proper location and that there are no large obstacles between the optimizer microphone and the walls in your listening room. Notes • After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. • Do not connect the optimizer microphone to an extension cable as doing so may result in an inaccurate sound optimization. • An error may occur during the AUTO SETUP procedure if the optimizer microphone is not properly placed in your listening room. To avoid the possibility of an error: – Do not place the optimizer microphone to the extreme right or left from the center of this unit. – Do not place the optimizer microphone within 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit. – Do not place the optimizer microphone more than 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. • Make sure that there are no obstacles between the optimizer microphone and the walls in your listening room as these objects obstruct the path of sound beams. However, any objects that are in contact with the walls will be regarded as a protruding part of the walls. • The best possible results are achieved if the optimizer microphone is placed at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. However, if this is not possible, you can manually fine-tune the sound beam angle and balance the sound beam output levels using MANUAL SETUP (see page 57) once the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed. • If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover/high cut frequency controls is connected to this unit, set the volume between 10 and 12 o’clock as viewed on a conventional clockface and set the crossover/high cut frequency to the maximum. CROSSOVER HIGH CUT VOLUME MIN MAX MIN MAX Subwoofer 1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control to turn off the power of this unit. or STANDBY/ON Front panel 2 Remote control Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. OPTIMIZER MIC 3 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of the unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of the unit with the optimizer microphone head upward at your normal listening position. Note Be sure to place the optimizer microphone on an imaginary center line drawn from this unit. y You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone Within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) Cardboard microphone stand 28 En Sofa AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Once the optimizer microphone is firmly connected to this unit and properly placed in your listening room, follow the procedure below to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. You can also enter the AUTO SETUP procedure simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP on the remote control for more than 2 seconds. In this case, this unit performs both of the beam optimization and sound optimization procedures. Center line Optimizer microphone ■ Assembling the supplied cardboard microphone stand You will find three separate parts (one circular-shaped part and two longitudinal-shaped parts) of the cardboard microphone stand originally put together. + STANDBY/ON SETUP 1 VOLUME 2 POWER POWER STANDBY/ON STB VCR INPUT1 AV TV DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO 3 4 MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER Disassemble the three parts of the cardboard microphone stand originally put together. 2 Insert one of the longitudinal-shaped part into the crevice of the other longitudinalshaped part. 3 Place the circular-shaped part on top of the two combined longitudinal-shaped parts. 4 Place the supplied optimizer microphone on top of the circular-shaped part. YSP TEST RETURN English 1 29 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 3 Notes • Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible while this unit is performing the AUTO SETUP procedure. • To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself from your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound beams. • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • The AUTO SETUP procedure may not be run successfully if this unit is installed in one of the rooms described in “Before installing this unit” on page 11. In such cases, run MANUAL SETUP (see page 57) to manually adjust the corresponding parameters. • If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played, the AUTO SETUP procedure stops and then an error message appears on the screen. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 33 for appropriate remedies. SET MENU MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed on the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN on the remote control. • To cancel the SET MENU screen, press MENU again. • You can start the BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ procedure simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP on the remote control for more than 2 seconds. Step 4 and 5 are skipped and then the screen shown in step 5 is displayed on your TV. Start the AUTO SETUP procedure from step 6. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. y • The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes maximum. A chime is played when the AUTO SETUP procedure is run successfully. • If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend following the procedure below. 1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection. 2. Run BEAM OPTIMZ only. 3. Close the curtains. 4. Run SOUND OPTIMZ only. • You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 34). A set of settings optimized according to specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening environment (see page 35). Press MENU on the remote control. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. 4 Press / on the remote control to select AUTO SETUP and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER 1 ENTER Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control to turn on the power of this unit. If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the power of the subwoofer. ;AUTO SETUP or . 1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ 2)BEAM OPTIMZ only 3)SOUND OPTIMZ only STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TV/AV YSP 30 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 5 Press / to select BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ, BEAM OPTIMZ only or SOUND OPTIMZ only and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER 6 Check the following points once again before starting the AUTO SETUP procedure. • Is the optimizer microphone firmly connected to this unit? • Is the optimizer microphone placed in a proper location? • Are there any large obstacles in between the optimizer microphone and the walls in your listening room? 7 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. The following screen appears on your TV and the AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds. Evacuate yourself from your listening room before starting the AUTO SETUP procedure. ENTER AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the YSP unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ (Beam optimization and sound optimization) Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you make settings for the first time. • If the unit has been relocated. • If your listening room has been restructured. • If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.) have been rearranged. This menu takes about 3 minutes. BEAM OPTIMZ only (Beam optimization only) Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment. This menu takes about 1 minute. SETUP ENTER AUTO SETUP START WILL BEGIN in 10SEC Please leave the room. **-------[RETURN]:Cancel If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and an error message is displayed. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 33 for a complete list of error messages and their proper remedies. Follow the instructions and perform the AUTO SETUP procedure again. SOUND OPTIMZ only (Sound optimization only) Use to optimize the beam delay, volume and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you have opened or closed the curtains in your listening room before using this unit. • If you have manually set the beam angle. This menu takes about 2 minutes. English Note You must optimize the beam angle in the BEAM OPTIMZ only procedure before starting the SOUND OPTIMZ only procedure. 31 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 8 Check that the following screen is displayed on your TV. The results of the AUTO SETUP procedure are displayed on your TV. 10 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Example 1 SHOW RESULT MEASUREMENT COMPLETE BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUB WOOFER:NOT APPLICABLE [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. Example 2 SHOW RESULT MEASUREMENT COMPLETE ENVIRONMENT CHECK[FAILED] BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUB WOOFER:YES [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. y • If ‘‘ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]’’ is displayed, we recommend running the AUTO SETUP procedure again. For details, see step 9. • If ‘‘SUB WOOFER: NOT APPLICABLE’’ is displayed even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit, increase the volume level of the subwoofer and run the AUTO SETUP procedure again. • Depending on the environment of your listening room, the beam angle of front left and right, and surround left and right may be set to the same value even if 5BEAM is displayed as a result. 9 Press ENTER to confirm the results or press RETURN to cancel the results. The following screen is displayed temporarily for 2 seconds and then disappears from your TV. AUTO SETUP COMPLETE ENTER Please remove the MIC from the YSP and the listening position. If ‘‘ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]’’ is displayed in step 8, the following screen is displayed after pressing ENTER. In this case, see ERROR E-1 in “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 33. Press ENTER to exit the AUTO SETUP and then run the procedure again from step 3. AUTO SETUP COMPLETE Your YSP unit may not be set up correctly. We recommend you try again. Please press [ENTER] key to exit. 32 En OPTIMIZER MIC AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP Before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts Error message ERROR E-2 No MIC Detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. Cause The optimizer microphone is not connected to this unit. Remedy Connect the optimizer microphone to this unit. See page 28 While the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress If one of the errors shown below except E-1 is displayed, press RETURN. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing AUTO SETUP on the remote control in step 3, run the procedure again from step 3 after once the screen disappears. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing MENU on the remote control in step 3, run the procedure again from step 4 after the screen in step 3 is displayed. Run the MANUAL SETUP if the problem is difficult to be saved. Error message Cause Remedy See page There is too much unwanted noise in your listening room. Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible. You may want to choose certain hours during the day when there is not much noise coming from outside. — ERROR E-2 No MIC detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. The optimizer microphone was disconnected while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Make sure that the optimizer microphone is firmly connected to this unit. 28 ERROR E-3 Unexpected control is detected. Please re-try. Some other operations were performed on this unit while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Do not perform any other operations while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. — ERROR E-4 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set in front of YSP. The optimizer microphone is not placed in front of this unit. Make sure that the optimizer microphone is installed in front of this unit. 28 ERROR E-5 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set above 1.8m/6ft. The optimizer microphone is not placed in the right distance from this unit. Make sure that the optimizer microphone is installed more than 1.8 m from the front of this unit and within 1 m from the center height of this unit. 28 ERROR E-6 Volume level is lower than expected. Please check MIC position/connection and re-try. The optimizer microphone cannot collect the sound produced by this unit because the sound output level is too low. Make sure that the optimizer microphone is firmly connected to this unit and placed in a proper location. If the problem persists, contact the nearest YAMAHA service center for assistance. 28 ERROR E-7 Unexpected error happened. Please re-try. An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure. — SETUP ERROR E-1 Please test in quieter environment. English 33 En USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY Convenient usage of the system memory 3 You can save the current settings adjusted in SET MENU in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if there are curtains in the path of beams, the effectiveness of the beams will vary depending on whether the curtains are open or closed. When the curtains are open Press / to select MEMORY and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER When the curtains are closed ;MEMORY . 1)LOAD 2)SAVE 4 Saving settings 1 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press / to select SAVE and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. ENTER TV/AV ENTER YSP 2 Press MENU on the remote control. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU MENU y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed on the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN on the remote control. • To cancel the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 34 En MEMORY2 MEMORY3 [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p MEMORY1 p . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP 1)MEMORY SAVE USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY 5 Press / to select MEMORY1, MEMORY2 or MEMORY3 and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. Loading settings You can recall the settings saved in “Saving settings” on page 34 according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. 1 ENTER Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. ENTER TV/AV YSP 2 2)MEMORY SAVE Press MENU on the remote control. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. MEMORY1 Save Now ? SET MENU MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP Push [ENTER] to Save Press ENTER again. The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1, MEMORY2 or MEMORY3. Once the parameters are saved, the display returns to the SET MENU screen. SETUP 6 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed on the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN on the remote control. • To cancel the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 2)MEMORY SAVE MEMORY1 Saving ENTER 3 Press / to select MEMORY and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. SET MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP ENTER ENTER 7 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press MENU to exit. The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV. ;MEMORY . 1)LOAD 2)SAVE MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter English 35 En USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY 4 Press / to select LOAD and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 6 Press ENTER again. The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1, MEMORY2 or MEMORY3. Once the parameters are saved, the display returns to the SET MENU screen. 1)MEMORY LOAD ENTER ENTER MEMORY1 Loading ENTER 1)MEMORY LOAD p MEMORY1 MEMORY2 MEMORY3 SET MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter 5 Press / to select MEMORY1, MEMORY2 or MEMORY3 and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 7 Press MENU to exit. The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV. MENU ENTER ENTER 1)MEMORY LOAD MEMORY1 Load Now ? Push [ENTER] to Load 36 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Selecting the input source You can play back sound from the components connected to this unit simply by pressing INPUT on the front panel repeatedly or pressing one of the input selector buttons (TV, STB, VCR, DVD or AUX) on the remote control. The name of the selected input source and the type of the corresponding input mode appear in the front panel display. ■ Front panel operations Press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to toggle between TV, DVD, VCR and AUX. The name of the corresponding input source and the type of the current input mode are shown in the front panel display. ■ Remote control operations Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit and then press TV on the remote control to play back a TV program. TV/AV TV YSP VOL INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON Name of the selected input source STB VCR DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit and then press STB on the remote control to play back a satellite broadcast. MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 TV/AV BASIC OPERATION INPUT1 Type of the selected input mode STB YSP OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU VOL TV/AV ENTER YSP TEST RETURN Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit and then press DVD on the remote control to play back a DVD. TV/AV DVD YSP VOL English 37 En PLAYBACK Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit and then press VCR on the remote control to play back a video tape. TV/AV 3 If necessary, turn down the volume of your TV until you cannot hear any sound. 4 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. VCR YSP TV/AV YSP VOL 5 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit and then press AUX on the remote control to play back a component connected to the AUX jack on the rear panel of this unit. DVD 6 TV/AV Press DVD on the remote control to select DVD as the input source. AUX YSP Play back the DVD on your DVD player using the supplied remote control. Audio signals from your DVD player are output from this unit. y VOL Playing back sources Once an input source is selected (see page 37), you can play back the selected input source. Note This section uses a DVD player as an example of the playback source. y For details on the TV and the DVD player you are using, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with the TV and the DVD player. 1 Turn on the power of your DVD player using the remote control supplied with the DVD player. 2 Switch to the video input on your TV using the remote control supplied with the TV so that the DVD menu screen is displayed. 38 En • You can check the digital signal being input at the DVD player with the digital connection (optical/coaxial). Press ST+3BEAM on the remote control while playing back a DVD recorded in 5.1 DIGITAL or channel. The indicator lights up when this unit detects the 5.1 channel signal input at the optical/ coaxial jack. If the PCM indicator lights up, confirm the digital connection and the settings of the digital output, bitstream output, and/or DTS output of the DVD player. • If the output volume is too low, increase the volume on this unit to around 45. • If you have set the appropriate remote control codes for your TV and DVD player, you can use the remote control supplied with this unit to operate these components. For details on how to set remote control codes, see page 77. PLAYBACK Adjusting the volume Muting the sound VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE CODE SET 1 INPUT VOLUME VOLUME + STANDBY/ON CH Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound. AUDIO MUTE ON appears in the front panel display, and the volume level indicator flashes. TV VOL MUTE MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE CODE SET Flashes VOL 2 VOLUME or VOLUME Press MUTE on the remote control again (or press VOLUME +/–) to resume the sound output. AUDIO MUTE OFF appears temporarily in the front panel display (or the numeric value of the current volume level appears if you press VOLUME +/–), and the volume level indicator lights up. BASIC OPERATION Press VOLUME +/– on the front panel or on the remote control to increase or decrease the volume level. The numeric value of the volume level appears in the front panel display. Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99, MAX (maximum) + VOLUME MUTE Front panel or Remote control VOL Lights up Notes • The volume level of all input sources (including multi-channel as well as stereo sources) changes at the same time. • One of the volume level increases or decreases each time you press VOLUME +/–. • You can continuously increase or decrease the volume level if you press and hold VOLUME +/–. VOL Note y You can select whether the sound output is to be muted completely or by 20 dB when you press MUTE (see page 64). 39 En English The sound output of all input sources (including multi-channel as well as stereo sources) is muted at the same time. ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND You can enjoy multi channel surround sound by changing the beam mode using the beam mode buttons on the remote control. Select 3 beam, 5 beam and stereo plus 3 beam for multi channel playback. Note When ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER is set in MANUAL SETUP (see page 59), 5 beam and 3 beam cannot be selected. 5 beam AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU Outputs sound beams from the front left and right, center, and surround left and right channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when watching DVDs recorded in a multi-channel format or playing back 2-channel sources in a multi-channel format. Press 5BEAM on the remote control to select the 5 beam. TV/AV ENTER YSP 5BEAM RETURN TEST 1 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. Notes TV/AV YSP 2 Press one of the beam mode buttons (5BEAM, ST+3BEAM or 3BEAM) to select the desired beam mode for 5.1-channel play back. 40 En 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 • To achieve the best surround sound effect, make sure that there are no obstacles placed in the path of sound beams in that the objects may prevent the beams from rebounding directly off the walls in your listening room. • The front left and right sound beams are output towards the walls in your listening room. ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Stereo plus 3 beam 3 beam Outputs normal sound from the front left and right channels and sound beams from the center and surround left and right channels. This mode is ideal for watching live recordings on a DVD. Vocals and instrumental sounds can be heard close to the center of the listening position while sound reflections from the venue itself can be heard on your right and left, giving you the feeling that you are sitting right in front of the stage. Outputs sound beams from the front left and right and center channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies with the whole family. Because the listening position area is widened, you can enjoy excellent quality surround sound over a wider area. In addition, you can use this mode when the listening position is close to the backside of the wall and the surround left and right beams cannot reflect. Press ST+3BEAM on the remote control to select the stereo plus 3 beam. Press 3BEAM on the remote control to select the 3 beam. ST+3BEAM 2 3BEAM 3 y You can achieve a more realistic surround effect if you adjust settings for IMAGE LOCATION in BEAM MENU (see page 62). Notes Note • When you play back multi-channel sources, surround left and right signals are mixed down and output from the front left and right channels. • The front left and right sound beams are output towards the walls in your listening room. BASIC OPERATION The front left and right sound beams are output directly to the listening position. English 41 En ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND ■ Decoder indicators Depending on the input source and the selected surround mode, the indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: Status When PCM signals are being input Indicator PCM When DTS digital signals are being input or when DTS Neo:6 is selected When Dolby Digital signals are being input When Dolby Pro Logic is selected When Dolby Pro Logic II is selected Recommended source Surround mode Dolby Pro Logic – All sources Dolby Pro Logic II Movie Music Game Movies Music Games DTS Neo:6 Cinema Music Movies Music Notes DIGITAL PL PL y • You can select an input mode (AUTO, DTS or ANALOG) by pressing INPUTMODE on the remote control repeatedly (see page 71). • Discs encoded in DTS-ES or Dolby Digital 5.1 EX will be played back in DTS or Dolby Digital. 42 En ■ Surround modes and recommended sources • Surround modes are available when the beam mode is set to a setting other than the stereo playback or the my beam as the beam mode. • When you select an input source (see page 37), the surround mode used for the previously selected input source is selected. • If the power of this unit is turned off and on again, the surround mode used for the previously selected input source before the power was turned off is selected. • The surround modes are available only when the CINEMA DSP programs are turned off (see page 51) or when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 50). • Only Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie and DTS Neo:6 Cinema are available when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 50). • If the surround modes are not available, “Prohibit” appears in the front panel display when you press SURROUND on the remote control. • The surround modes are available only when 2-channel signals are being input. If you try to switch between the surround modes when 5.1 channel signals are being input, “Prohibit” appears in the front panel display. ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 5.1 channel playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound effects by switching the surround mode. 2 Press SURROUND on the remote control repeatedly (or press SURROUND and then press / ) to switch between surround modes. SURROUND y 6 The surround modes are available only when the CINEMA DSP programs are turned off (see page 51) or when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 50). In addition, the beam mode must be set to the 5 beam, the stereo plus 3 beam or the 3 beam (see page 40). or SURROUND 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO 6 ENTER MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU PRO LOGIC TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST PLII Movie PLII Music 1 TV/AV PLII Game Neo:6 Cinema YSP Neo:6 Music BASIC OPERATION Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. Example of the surround mode display in the front panel display when the CINEMA DSP program is turned off English 43 En ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying TV in surround sound 5 You can enjoy analog audio signals output from your TV in real surround sound. Press VOLUME +/– on the remote control to adjust the volume level. VOLUME y Before performing the steps below, set the volume of this unit to 30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in step 4 below. INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF +10 0 CH LEVEL MENU 6 Press SURROUND repeatedly (or press SURROUND and then press / ) on the remote control to select a surround mode. Signals input from 2-channel sources are played back on multiple channels. For more information on surround modes, see page 42. TV/AV ENTER SURROUND YSP RETURN TEST VOLUME CH 6 TV VOL or SURROUND 6 1 Select the TV channel you want to watch. To select a TV channel, use the remote control supplied with your TV. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TV/AV YSP 3 Press TV on the remote control. This unit outputs audio signals from your TV. TV 4 If you hear sound from your TV speakers, reduce the volume level of your TV until you can no longer hear any audio being output. To reduce the TV volume level, use the remote control supplied with your TV. 44 En ENTER ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Adjusting surround mode parameters You can configure the parameters for Dolby Pro Logic II Music and DTS Neo:6 Music to fine-tune the surround sound effect. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST 1 2 Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound” on page 43 and select PL II Music or Neo:6 Music. Press / to select the parameter. ■ When Dolby Pro Logic II Music is selected PANORAMA Gives front left and right channel sound a wraparound effect, distributed throughout the entire surround sound field to give you an expansive feeling. Choices: ON/OFF Default setting: OFF DIMENSION Adjusts the difference in volume between front and surround channels to the volume balance you desire. Control range: –3 (toward the surround direction) to +3 (toward the front direction) Default setting: STD CT WIDTH Distributes the center channel sound to the left and right. If set to 0, center channel sounds output only from the center channel. Control range: 0 to 7 Default setting: 3 ■ When DTS Neo:6 Music is selected ENTER 3 Press / BASIC OPERATION C. IMAGE Adjusts the center image from three channels (front and center) to varying degrees. Control range: 0.0 (wider) to 1.0 (toward the center) Default setting: 0.3 to configure the parameter. ENTER English 45 En ENJOYING STEREO SOUND ENJOYING STEREO SOUND Stereo playback Notes You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback by changing the beam mode to the stereo playback using the beam mode buttons on the remote control. The normal sounds are output from the front and left channels in the 2-channel stereo. This is ideal for playing back hi-fi sources, such as CDs, and can be used to replace your TV speakers. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TV/AV YSP 2 Press STEREO on the remote control to select the stereo playback as a beam mode. STEREO 4 46 En • When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except those for the front left and right channels are mixed down and output from the front left and right channels. No audio is output from the center and rear channels. • The surround mode becomes disabled when the stereo playback is selected as the beam mode. • When you play back Dolby Digital audio signals in the stereo playback, the dynamic range becomes compressed. If the volume level decreases to the extreme, use other beam modes except the my beam. • If the stereo playback is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 42) and the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 50) become ineffective. PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (MY BEAM) PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (My beam) You can improve listenability in a noisy environment by changing the beam mode to the my beam, outputs sound beams directly to the listening position in a single channel. In addition, the my beam is also ideal if you do not want the sound beams to be reflected on the walls in your listening room or if you do not disturb others asleep while enjoying music or movies at night. My beam microphone POWER POWER STANDBY/ON AV TV 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST Note Using auto-adjust function The my beam microphone on the remote control collects the test tones from this unit, and then the beam angle is automatically adjusted. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TV/AV YSP 2 Notes • If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and MY BEAM ERROR is displayed on the front panel display. • An error may occur if the listening room is noisy. Make sure that the listening room is as quiet as possible during the test tones are being output. • Do not shake or move the remote control during the test tones are being output. • Do not cover the my beam microphone on the remote control during the test tones are being output. • The batteries in the remote control may be week if the remote control does not function properly. In such case, replace all the batteries and then try the procedure again. BASIC OPERATION If the my beam is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 42), the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 49) and the TruBass (see page 54) become ineffective. In addition, no audio is output from the subwoofer connected to this unit. Press and hold MY BEAM on the remote control more than 2 seconds. A test tone is output twice from this unit. Keep pointing the remote control toward this unit during the test tones are being output so that the my beam microphone can collect the test tones. Control range: L50° to R50° Operation guarantee range: 6 m, L30° to R30° MY BEAM English 5 47 En PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (My beam) Using manual-adjust function You can adjust the beam angle manually while playing back an input source. This function is also ideal if the listening position is out of the operation guarantee range of the auto-adjust function. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TV/AV YSP 2 Press MY BEAM on the remote control. MY BEAM is displayed in the front panel display. MY BEAM 5 3 Press / while MY BEAM is displayed to adjust the angle. Control range: L90° to R90° • Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle on the left side. • Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle on the right side. ENTER VOL 48 En USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from stereo or multi-channel sources. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA CINEMA DSP (digital sound field processing) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of the sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS and Dolby Surround sources. Note Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference and do not purely rely on the name of the sound field program itself. What is a sound field? A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable the listener to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which the listening is sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine with the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument to make up the sound field. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 80 ms after the direct sound) after reflecting from one surface only (from the ceiling or a wall, for example). Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. BASIC OPERATION Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (i.e. wall, ceiling, the back of the room, etc.) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor or a listening room of virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the CINEMA DSP technology. English 49 En USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Turning on CINEMA DSP programs You can select from three different sound field programs (MUSIC, MOVIE and SPORTS) depending on the type of sources you want to enjoy. Notes • The CINEMA DSP programs are not available if the stereo playback (see page 46) or the my beam (see page 47) is selected as the beam mode. • If the CINEMA DSP programs are not available, “Prohibit” appears in the front panel display when you press one of the sound field program buttons on the remote control. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO ■ Movie program Select this sound field program when you play movie sources, especially the ones encoded in Dolby Digital, DTS or Dolby Surround. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. 1 TV/AV YSP 2 MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. Press MOVIE on the remote control to select the movie sound field program. MOVIE 8 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU ■ Sports program TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST Select this sound field program when you play sports sources. This program densely concentrates the vocal sound of the commentator in the center while broadening the sound from the audience or the environment all around your listening room. ■ Music program Select this sound field program when you play music sources. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are seated in an actual rock or jazz concert hall. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TV/AV 1 YSP Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. 2 TV/AV Press SPORTS on the remote control to select the sports sound field program. YSP SPORTS 9 2 Press MUSIC on the remote control to select the music sound field program. MUSIC 7 50 En USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Turning off CINEMA DSP programs Adjusting CINEMA DSP effect levels Turn off the CINEMA DSP programs if you want to enjoy the original sound without the sound field program effect. You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. However, you can also adjust the effect level of the CINEMA DSP programs relative to the level of the direct sound so that each sound field program can reflect your listening environment and your preference even more accurately. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. 1 TV/AV YSP 2 Press OFF on the remote control to turn off the sound field programs. CINEMA DSP OFF is shown in the front panel display. Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TV/AV YSP 2 OFF 0 Press MUSIC, MOVIE or SPORTS on the remote control to select the desired sound field program. MUSIC 7 MOVIE or 8 SPORTS or 9 VOL 3 Press / on the remote control. DSP LEVEL is shown in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION VOL 4 Press / on the remote control to adjust the effect level of the CINEMA DSP programs. ENTER Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB • A larger value increases the effect level. • A smaller value decreases the effect level. English 51 En USING THE VOLUME MODE (NIGHT LISTENING MODE/TV VOLUME EQUAL MODE) USING THE VOLUME MODE (Night listening mode/TV volume equal mode) The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. In addition, you can limit the volume level of the TV so that it will not vary suddenly to a great extent whenever the contents being broadcast change (i.e. due to commercials, etc.). INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO 2 Press VOL MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, TV EQUAL VOL or OFF. VOL MODE MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV NIGHT:CINEMA ENTER YSP RETURN TEST 1 NIGHT:MUSIC Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TV/AV YSP TV EQUAL VOL OFF The NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display when NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is selected. NIGHT Lights up • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select TV EQUAL VOL when watching TV programs. • Select OFF to turn off the volume mode. 52 En USING THE VOLUME MODE (Night listening mode/TV volume equal mode) 3 Press / on the remote control to adjust the effect level of compression while NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC or TV EQUAL VOL is displayed. ENTER Effect.Lvl:MIN Effect.Lvl:MID Effect.Lvl:MAX • Select Effect.Lvl:MIN for minimum compression. • Select Effect.Lvl:MID for standard compression. • Select Effect.Lvl:MAX for maximum compression. Note BASIC OPERATION The volume mode settings are canceled if you press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control or if you disconnect the power supply cable from the AC wall outlet. English 53 En USING BASS SOUND ENHANCER (TRUBASS) USING BASS SOUND ENHANCER (TruBass) This unit can produce the perception of an improved low frequency performance with the aid of the SRS TruBass technology, which improves bass even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer. Note The TruBass is not available when the my beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 47). 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO 3 MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 Press on the remote control repeatedly to select TruBass ON or TruBass OFF. OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST 1 TruBass ON TruBass OFF Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TV/AV YSP 2 Press on the remote control. The current setting (TruBass ON or TruBass OFF) is shown in the front panel display. VOL or VOL 54 En • Select TruBass OFF to turn off the TruBass. USING THE SLEEP TIMER USING THE SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified time period. The sleep timer is useful if you are going to sleep after a certain amount of time while this unit is still playing back a source. Each time you press SLEEP on the remote control, the front panel display changes as shown below. Setting the sleep timer SLEEP AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min SLEEP 60min SLEEP 30min SLEEP OFF OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. 3 TV/AV 2 Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the amount of time for the sleep timer. Choices: 120min, 90min, 60min, 30min, OFF The SLEEP indicator in the front panel display flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. BASIC OPERATION YSP Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated. SLEEP Lights up SLEEP SLEEP Flashes English 55 En USING THE SLEEP TIMER Canceling the sleep timer 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TV/AV YSP 2 Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly so that SLEEP OFF appears in the front panel display. SLEEP VOL SLEEP 3 OFF Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator disappears from the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is deactivated. SLEEP Disappears Note The previous setting for the sleep timer before you deactivate it is stored in the system memory and automatically restored when you make a new setting next time. y The sleep timer setting can also be deactivated if you press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode or unplug the power supply cable from the AC outlet. 56 En MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP To achieve the best quality surround sound, you can use MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune the listening environment parameters, as well as to make advanced settings for sound signals, sound beams, digital input and the OSD. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your own listening environment. y • You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 34). A set of settings optimized according to specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening environment (see page 35). • Most of the parameters in SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU are automatically set when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 27). Use SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU to make additional adjustments. • BEAM MENU allows you to make settings for the surround sound effects normally available in the speaker settings menu. • Make settings for the parameters in BEAM MENU first before you make settings for the parameters in SOUND MENU, INPUT MENU and DISPLAY MENU. SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the sound output. Item Features Page TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or low-frequency sound. 63 SUBWOOFER SET Adjusts the various subwoofer settings. 63 MUTE LEVEL Adjusts the muting level. 64 AUDIO DELAY Adjusts audio delay. 64 ROOM EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the listening room. 64 DD/DTS Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 64 BEAM MENU Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the sound beam output. Item Features Page SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts listening room and listening position settings. 59 BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts various beam settings. 60 IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front left and right channels. 62 Item Features Page INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 65 INPUT MODE Selects the initial input of the source. 65 INPUT TRIM Adjusts the input level of the source. 65 INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source. 66 ADVANCED OPERATION INPUT MENU Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the audio and video input. DISPLAY MENU Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the display. Item Features Page Adjusts the brightness of the display. 67 OSD SET Adjusts the display position and the background color of the OSD. 67 UNIT SET Changes the display unit of measurement. 67 57 En English DIMMER SET MANUAL SETUP Using MANUAL SETUP 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 Press / to select MANUAL SETUP and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER ;MANUAL SETUP YSP RETURN TEST . 1)SOUND MENU 2)BEAM MENU 3)INPUT MENU 4)DISPLAY MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y You can adjust the SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. 4 Press / to select a sub menu and then press ENTER. TV/AV YSP ENTER 2 ENTER Press MENU on the remote control. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP 5 Press / / / each parameter. and ENTER to configure p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed on the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN on the remote control. • To cancel the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. ENTER 6 Press MENU to exit. The OSD disappears from your TV screen. MENU 58 En MANUAL SETUP BEAM MENU Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the sound beam output. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM MENU • Select FLAT TO WALL if this unit is installed in parallel with the wall in your listening room. Adjust the width and length of your listening room as well as the distance of the listening position from this unit and the distance of the center of this unit from the left wall. Listening position from the left wall 2)BEAM MENU . A)SETTING PARAMETERS B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT C)IMAGE LOCATION Listening position from the unit p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Room length y Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room and the distance of this unit from the listening position. When you make settings for each parameter, other related parameters are automatically adjusted to best match your listening environment. Choices for the room width and length: 2.0 m to 12.0 m Choices for the listening position from this unit: 1.8 m to 9.0 m Choices for the listening position from the left wall: 0.6 m to 11.4 m A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3 Note p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p A)SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3 . INSTALLED POSITION ;;;;;FLAT TO WALL p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p If you make adjustments in SETTING PARAMETERS, the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will be lost. If you want to keep the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP and make further adjustments, adjust settings in BEAM ADJUSTMENT first (see page 60). | -------[ 5.4m ]| 4.9m | Room width and length A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3 Listening position from the unit and the left wall --------| 2.7m [ 2.5m ] | p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return INSTALLED POSITION (Installed position of this unit) Use to adjust the installed position of this unit. Choices: FLAT TO WALL (Parallel to wall installation), ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (Corner installation) FLAT TO WALL ADVANCED OPERATION p p ■ SETTING PARAMETERS (Setting parameters) Room width p You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel in “ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE” (see page 68). ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER English 59 En MANUAL SETUP • Select ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER if this unit is installed in the corner in your listening room. Adjust the width and length of your listening room as well as the distance of the listening position from this unit. Listening position from the unit ■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment) Use to manually adjust the various beam settings. We recommend that you select 5 beam as the beam mode before adjusting these parameters. Notes • When INSTALLED POSITION is adjusted in MANUAL SETUP (see page 59), the factory default value is automatically set for this parameter except CENTER in FOCAL LENGTH (see page 61). • Depending on the beam mode settings (see pages 40 and 46), some channel positions may not be available for selection. In this case, “– –” is displayed. When using the stereo plus 3 beam as the beam mode, set the surround left and right signals to be output from the front left and right channels. Room width Room length B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT Choices for the room width and length: 2.0 m to 12.0 m Choices for the listening position from this unit: 1.8 m to 9.0 m | [ 5.4m ] | | p p Room width and length p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3 Listening position from the unit p ----- 5.4m --- [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3 . a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH c)FOCAL LENGTH d)TREBLE GAIN HORIZONTAL ANGLE (Horizontal angle) Use to adjust the horizontal angle of beams for each channel. By adjusting the horizontal angle of the beams, you can optimize the sound beam paths. A test tone is automatically output. (−) (+) (+) (−) \ [ 2.5m ] \ p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return Note When you set the INSTALLED POSITION parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 59), the parameters newly set for the width and length of your listening room are automatically set as the factory default value. Choices: L90° to R90° Adjust towards L (left) to move the direction of the output to the left and adjust towards R (right) to move it to the right. a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE5 beam 1/5 Front L L65deg L90 R90 * p 60 En p p p 0(deg) [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return MANUAL SETUP BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH (Beam travel length) A certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each channel so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. This menu sets the distance that sound beams travel after being output and reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening position and adjust the delay applied to the respective channel. The lines in the illustration below indicate the distance. FOCAL LENGTH (Focal length) Use to set the distance from the front of this unit to the focal point of output for each channel and adjust an expansive feeling of each channel. The focal points except the center channel should be set near the reflection points on the walls. The shorter the distance, more the expansion. focal length focal point sweet spot b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH 5 beam . Front L;;;;;;;6.0m Front R;;;;;;;6.0m Center;;;;;;;;2.5m Surround L;;;;9.1m Surround R;;;;9.1m p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return We recommend that you use the setting optimized by the AUTO SETUP (see page 27). Set this menu only when you changed the HORIZONTAL ANGLE (see page 60). Center channel Choices: –1.0 m to +13.0 m Adjust towards – (minus) to move the focus outward and adjust towards + (plus) to move the focus towards the normal position. • Front L adjusts the focal length for the front left sound beams. • Front R adjusts the focal length for the front right sound beams. • Center adjusts the focal length for the center sound beams. Initial setting: –0.5 m • Surround L adjusts the focal length for the surround left sound beams. • Surround R adjusts the focal length for the surround right sound beams. y ADVANCED OPERATION y Front left channel We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.5 m) for the center channel. c)FOCAL LENGTH 5 beam . Front L;;;;;;+1.5m Front R;;;;;;+1.5m Center;;;;;;;-0.5m Surround L;;;+2.3m Surround R;;;+2.3m p p Choices: 0.3 m to 24.0 m • Front L adjusts the distance the front left channel sound beams travel. • Front R adjusts the distance the front right channel sound beams travel. • Center adjusts the distance the center channel sound beams travel. • Surround L adjusts the distance the surround left channel sound beams travel. • Surround R adjusts the distance the surround right channel sound beams travel. p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return English 61 En MANUAL SETUP TREBLE GAIN (Treble gain) Use to adjust the high frequency output level of each channel. y If the reflection point of the front left and right or surround left and right sound beams is a curtain or other acoustically absorbent surface, you can achieve more effective surround sound by increasing the treble level for those sound beams. ■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location) Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and right channel sound is heard so that the each sound can be heard closer to the center channel. Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound coming from the front left and right seems unnatural, such as when your listening position is not the center of your listening room. You can only adjust this parameter when 3 beam or 5 beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 40). Choices: ON, OFF Setting range: 0% to 95% Initial setting: 0% C)IMAGE LOCATION . OFF C p L )ON R LEFT;;;;;;;;;;;0% RIGHT;;;;;;;;;;0% p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p Choices: –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB • FL adjusts the high frequency output level of the front left channel. • FR adjusts the high frequency output level of the front right channel. • C adjusts the high frequency output level of the center channel. • SL adjusts the high frequency output level of the surround left channel. • SR adjusts the high frequency output level of the surround right channel. LEFT (Left) Adjusts audio signals towards the left. The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center. Without adjustment With the front left channel adjusted d)TREBLE GAIN -5beam+ . Front L;;;;;;;;0dB -----Front R;;;;;;;;0dB -----Center;;;;;;;;;0dB -----Surround L;;;;;0dB -----Surround R;;;;;0dB ------ p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return RIGHT (Right) Adjusts audio signals towards the right. The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center. Without adjustment 62 En With the front right channel adjusted MANUAL SETUP ■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer set) SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust various subwoofer settings. p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control) You can adjust the tonal quality of the sound beams. A)TONE CONTROLTREBLE;;;;;0dB - p p + -----+ ------ p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return TREBLE (Treble) Use to adjust the high frequency response. Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB Initial setting: 0 dB BASS (Bass) Use to adjust the low frequency response. Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB Initial setting: 0 dB p p . A)TONE CONTROL B)SUBWOOFER SET C)MUTE LEVEL D)AUDIO DELAY E)ROOM EQ F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range BASS;;;;;;;0dB BASS OUT;;;;;FRONT CROSS OVER;;;100Hz LFE LEVEL;;;;;;0dB DISTANCE;;;;;;3.0m p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return 1)SOUND MENU . B)SUBWOOFER SET . p Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the sound output. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SOUND MENU BASS OUT (Bass out) Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer and/or the front left and right channels. This setting also determines the routing of LFE (low-frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer. • Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front left and right channels. CROSS OVER (Cross over) When BASS OUT is set to SWFR, you can use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer speaker position. Choices: 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz DISTANCE (Distance) Select to adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the listening position. Choices: 0.3 to 15.0 m Initial setting: 3.0 m ADVANCED OPERATION LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 dB English 63 En MANUAL SETUP ■ MUTE LEVEL (Muting level) Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the volume level. Choices: MUTE, –20 dB • Select MUTE to completely halt all sound output. • Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume level by 20 dB. C)MUTE LEVEL pMUTE Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Dynamic range is the difference between the smallest sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound that can be heard without distortion. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) p p -20dB ■ DD/DTS Dynamic Range (Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and DTS signals) [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range p ■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay) Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 160 msec D)AUDIO DELAY AUDIO DELAY;;;;;0msec p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return ■ ROOM EQ (Room equalizer) Use to change the tonal qualities of your listening room when the unit is mounted on the wall. Choices: MOUNTING (Mount type), REFLECTING (Reflectivity type) E)ROOM EQ . MOUNTING;;;;;SHELF REFLECTING;;;NORMAL p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return MOUNTING (Mount type) Use to enhance medium to low range sounds. Choices: WALL (Wall mount), SHELF (Shelf mount) • Select WALL if this unit is mounted on the wall in your listening room. • Select SHELF if this unit is mounted on the shelf in your listening room. REFLECTING (Reflectivity type) Use to select the reflectivity of your listening room. Choices: NORMAL (Normal), HI ECHO (High echo) • Select NORMAL if your listening room has a normal reflectivity. • Select HI ECHO if your listening room has highly reflective surfaces such as concrete walls. 64 En STD pMAX p MIN [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Select to adjust the dynamic range compression. • Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels. • Select STD for general use. • Select MAX for feature films. MANUAL SETUP ■ INPUT MODE (Input mode) INPUT MENU Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the audio and video input. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → INPUT MENU Use to designate the input mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. For information on the types of audio signals that can be output by this unit, see “Surround modes and recommended sources” on page 42. Choices: AUTO, LAST 3 INPUT MENU . A)INPUT B)INPUT C)INPUT D)INPUT B)INPUT MODE ASSIGNMENT MODE TRIM RENAME pAUTO LAST p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return TV TV AUX AUX ) ) p p . (1);;;;; ( (2);;;;; ( p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT 2/2 COAXIAL IN DVD DVD p ) p . (3);;;;; ( p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return Use to adjust the input level of the input source. C)INPUT TRIM . TV VCR AUX DVD ANALOG;;;-3.0dB OPTICAL;;-3.0dB ANALOG;;;-3.0dB COAXIAL;;-3.0dB COAXIAL;;-3.0dB p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return 65 En English • Select TV ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the TV/STB analog audio input jacks of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select TV OPTICAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the TV OPTICAL IN jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select VCR ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the VCR analog audio input jacks of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX OPTICAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the AUX OPTICAL IN jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select DVD COAXIAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the COAXIAL IN jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB ADVANCED OPERATION • Select COAXIAL IN to assign components to the COAXIAL IN jack of this unit. Choices: DVD, AUX ■ INPUT TRIM (Input trim) p A)INPUTOPTICAL ASSIGNMENT 1/2 IN • Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that input source. If the type of input signal is different from the setting, no sounds will be produced. p Use to assign the optical and coaxial digital input jacks of this unit to other components if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. By assigning other components to the input jacks on this unit, you can display the name of the connected component in the front panel display and OSD, and operate the component with the input selector button of the same name. If you connect a component to the input jacks of this unit and do not assign it, the default component name for that input jack is displayed in the front panel and OSD when selected. • Select OPTICAL IN (1) to assign components to the TV OPTICAL IN jack of this unit. Choices: TV, VCR • Select OPTICAL IN (2) to assign components to the AUX OPTICAL IN jack of this unit. Choices: AUX, DVD p ■ INPUT ASSIGNMENT (Input assignment) MANUAL SETUP ■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename) Use to change the name of the input source in the OSD and the front panel display. Press an input selector button (TV, STB, DVD, VCR, or AUX) to select the component you want to change the name for and then perform the following procedure. D)INPUT RENAME DVD -> DVD p p 1 p p [ ]/[ ]:Position [ ]/[ ]:Character [ENTER]:Return Press / to place the _ (underbar) under the space or the character you want to edit. The _ (underbar) flashes. ENTER 2 Press / to select the desired character. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press to change the character in the following order or press to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, etc. ENTER 3 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input. 4 Press ENTER to exit. The new names are registered, and the display returns to the previous screen. ENTER 66 En MANUAL SETUP ■ OSD SET (OSD settings) DISPLAY MENU Use to manually adjust various parameters related to the display. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → DISPLAY MENU Use to adjust the display position and the background color of the OSD. B)OSD SET . OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;0 OSD BACK COLOR;;;BLUE p p 4 DISPLAY MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return . A)DIMMER SET B)OSD SET C)UNIT SET p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ DIMMER SET (Dimmer settings) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. A)DIMMER SET . STANDARD DIMMER;;;;;OFF AUTO DIMMER ;;;;;;;;;;;;;OFF p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return OSD SHIFT (OSD shift) Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust towards the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the OSD, and adjust towards the + (plus) direction to lower it. Choices: –5 to +5 Initial setting: 0 OSD BACK COLOR (OSD background color) Use to select the background color of the OSD. Choices: BLUE, GRAY ■ UNIT SET (Unit settings) AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer) If no operation is performed for a specified period, the front panel display dims. Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display in this case. Choices: OFF (the same brightness as the STANDARD DIMMER setting), –1 to –3 (based on the STANDARD DIMMER setting), DISPLAY OFF C)UNIT SET pMETERS p FEET p STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display when you operate this unit by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. Choices: –2, –1, OFF Use this to change the display unit of measurement. Choices: METERS, FEET [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select METERS to input distances in meters. • Select FEET to input distances in feet. ADVANCED OPERATION English 67 En ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel by using the test tone or the audio output being played back in each beam mode to achieve a more true-to-life surround sound experience. 3 Using the test tone You can use the test tone feature to output a test tone from each channel to manually balance the channel levels. Use the test tone to set channel levels so that the volume level of each channel is identical when heard from your listening position. Press / to select the channel you want to adjust. The front panel display changes as follows. TEST FRONT L TEST CENTER ENTER OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL TEST FRONT R MENU TEST SUR.R TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST TEST SUR.L TEST SWFR 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TEST SWFR is only available when a subwoofer is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 63). TV/AV YSP 2 Note Press TEST on the remote control. TEST FRONT L appears in the front panel display and a test tone is output from the front left channel. 4 Press / to adjust channel volumes. TEST ENTER Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB VOL TEST FRONT L 68 En ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE 5 Press TEST when you have completed all your adjustments. TEST Using the audio output being played back You can also manually adjust the channel levels while playing back an input source such as a DVD. OFF 0 Notes • All the channel levels cannot be adjusted when the stereo playback or my beam is selected as the beam mode (see pages 46 and 47). • FRONT L/R cannot be adjusted when the stereo plus 3 beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 41). • FRONT L/R are automatically adjusted depending on the settings of the other channels when the stereo plus 3 beam or stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 41 and 46). +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. y If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, – –dB appears in the front panel display. TV/AV YSP 2 Press CH LEVEL repeatedly (or press CH LEVEL and then / ) to select the channel you want to adjust. The front panel display changes as follows. CH LEVEL or CH LEVEL ENTER ADVANCED OPERATION FRONT L +1.0dB CENTER -2.5dB FRONT R +1.0dB SUR.R +2.0dB SUR.L +2.0dB --dB 69 En English SWFR ADJUSTING THE AUDIO BALANCE Note SWFR is only available when a subwoofer is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 63). 3 Press / to adjust channel volumes. ENTER Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB 4 Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit when you have completed your adjustment. Notes • All the channel levels cannot be adjusted when the stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see page 46). • FRONT L/R cannot be adjusted when the stereo plus 3 is selected as the beam mode (see page 41). • Only CENTER can be adjusted when the my beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 47). • FRONT L/R are automatically adjusted depending on the settings of the other channels when the stereo plus 3 beam or stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 41 and 46). y If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, – –dB appears in the front panel display. 70 En SELECTING THE INPUT MODE SELECTING THE INPUT MODE You can select the type of audio input signals of the selected input source according to your preference or the conditions of the input source. y We recommend setting the input mode to AUTO in most cases. Notes STB • The input mode of VCR is fixed to ANALOG. However, if the TV OPTICAL IN jack of this unit is assigned to VCR, AUTO, DTS and ANALOG become available as the input mode of VCR (see page 65). • ANALOG is not available as the input mode of DVD and AUX. POWER POWER STANDBY/ON VCR INPUT1 AV TV DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. • DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. Compared to AUTO, this input mode provides greater stability while playing back CDs or LDs encoded in DTS. TV/AV YSP 2 Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the desired input source. STB VCR DVD • ANALOG Selects only analog signals. Even when both digital and analog signals are input simultaneously, only analog signals are selected. y AUX You can adjust the default input mode to be selected when the power of this unit is turned on (see page 65). TV ADVANCED OPERATION 3 • AUTO Automatically selects audio input signals in the following priority order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS 2) PCM 3) Analog Use this input mode in most cases. Press INPUTMODE on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between input modes. INPUTMODE TV AUTO DVD AUTO AUX AUTO TV DTS DVD DTS AUX DTS TV ANALOG When DVD is selected as the input source When AUX is selected as the input source English When TV or STB is selected as the input source 71 En ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Using the system parameters 3 Release INPUT on the front panel. Follow the procedure below to enter the system parameters. INPUT Setting the MEMORY PROTECT You can protect the settings you saved in the system memory of this unit from being accidentally erased or unwantedly changed. INPUT VOLUME + 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on this page. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. STANDBY/ON CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST TV/AV YSP 1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power of this unit. 3 Confirm that MEMORY PROTECT is shown in the front panel display and then press ENTER. STANDBY/ON VOL 2 MEMORY PROTECT Press and hold INPUT on the front panel and then press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn on the power of this unit. MEMORY PROTECT is shown in the front panel display. ENTER INPUT STANDBY/ON VOL MEMORY PROTECT 72 En ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS 4 Press / to switch between PROTECT: ON and PROTECT: OFF. 3 Press / on the remote control so that MAX VOLUME SET is shown in the front panel display. ENTER ENTER VOL PROTECT: ON VOL MAX VOLUME SET VOL PROTECT: OFF 4 Press ENTER. • Select PROTECT: ON to activate the protection feature. • Select PROTECT: OFF to deactivate the protection feature. 5 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. ENTER 5 Press level. / to adjust the maximum volume STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ENTER You can set the maximum volume level so that this unit will not output sound beyond the limited volume level. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 72. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION Setting the MAX VOLUME Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, MIN Control step: 1 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON TV/AV YSP The new setting for the maximum volume level will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. English 73 En ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS Setting the TURN ON VOLUME 6 You can set the initial volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. 1 2 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 72. Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting for the maximum volume level will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. Setting the DEMO MODE TV/AV You can test the beam output from this unit to experience the sound beam. YSP 3 y Press / on the remote control so that TURN ON VOLUME is shown in the front panel display. You can also perform this function simply by pressing INPUT on the front panel. A sound beam is output from this unit when you press and hold INPUT for more than 2 seconds. The sound beam shuttles between left and right twice, and then stops. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 72. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. ENTER TV/AV YSP VOL TURN ON VOLUME 4 Press ENTER. ENTER 5 Press / 3 Press / on the remote control so that DEMO MODE is shown in the front panel display. ENTER to adjust the initial volume level. VOL DEMO MODE ENTER Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, OFF Control step: 1 74 En ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS 4 Press / to switch between DEMO: ON and DEMO: OFF. Setting the FACTORY PRESET You can reset all of the parameters of this unit to the factory presets. This procedure completely resets ALL the parameters in SET MENU. Note ENTER After performing the following procedure you must run the AUTO SETUP again to match your surround sound environment. VOL DEMO: ON 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 72. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. TV/AV YSP VOL DEMO: OFF 3 • Select DEMO: ON to activate the demo mode. • Select DEMO: OFF to deactivate the demo mode. 5 Press / on the remote control so that FACTORY PRESET is shown in the front panel display. Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. ENTER STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Press ENTER to test the sound beam. The sound beam being output shuttles between left and right. Press ENTER again to stop shuttling. VOL 4 ADVANCED OPERATION FACTORY PRESET Press ENTER. ENTER English 75 En ADJUSTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS 5 Press / to switch between PRESET: RESET and PRESET: CANCEL. ENTER VOL PRESET: RESET VOL PRESET: CANCEL • Select PRESET: RESET to reset all of the current settings. • Select PRESET: CANCEL to cancel the resetting procedure. 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 76 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/AV to change the control area. Note Depending on the external A/V component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control. Setting remote control codes 2 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area (TV, STB, DVD, VCR and AUX). For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. Press the numeric buttons to enter the remote control code while holding down CODE SET. Setting example: YAMAHA DVD input area SURROUND 6 TV MUTE While holding down, press STB VCR DVD INPUT1 SPORTS 9 CODE SET AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO SPORTS 9 TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO 3 MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST VOLUME CH TV VOL Refer to “Controlling other components” on page 78 to operate the external component using the remote control. If the external component functions correctly, the remote control code setup was successful. If the external component does not function correctly, the remote control code may be incorrect. Confirm that the remote control code is correct (see “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual) and start over from step 1. MUTE TV INPUT If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. TV MUTE CODE SET 1 Press and hold CODE SET on the remote control and then press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set a remote control code for. The transmission indicator flashes twice and then remains lit. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. STB TV MUTE VCR DVD If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and reset the remote control codes. When changing the batteries, be careful not to press any of the buttons on the remote control. Doing so will clear the contents of the memory. AUX English While holding down, press ADVANCED OPERATION Note TV CODE SET 77 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components ■ Operating your TV ■ Operating your DVD player Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and then press TV to select TV as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the TV operation mode. Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and then press DVD to select DVD as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the DVD operation mode. TV TV/AV DVD TV/AV YSP YSP POWER POWER STANDBY/ON AV POWER POWER STANDBY/ON TV AV TV 1 STB VCR DVD INPUT1 AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO 1 2 STB AUX AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 2 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 0 MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 8 9 OFF +10 CH LEVEL 0 MENU 4 ENTER YSP RETURN TEST CH +10 CH LEVEL TV/AV VOLUME STEREO 7 OFF MENU 3 TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST TV VOL VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5 5 4 MUTE 6 DVD TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 3 VCR INPUT1 TV TV INPUT TV MUTE CODE SET 7 CODE SET 6 1 TV POWER Turns on or off the power of your TV. 1 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your DVD player. 2 TV INPUT1/2 Selects the input source of the TV. 2 Numeric buttons Use to enter numeric digits. 3 Numeric buttons Selects a TV channel for playback. 3 MENU Displays the DVD menu. 4 CH +/– Switches between the available TV channels. 5 TV VOL +/– Adjusts the audio output level of the TV. 6 TV INPUT Switches the input source for the TV. 7 TV MUTE Temporarily mutes audio output from the TV. 78 En 4 Cursor buttons / / Use to select DVD menu items. / , ENTER 5 RETURN Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit the DVD menu. 6 Operation buttons for DVD and VCR players Use to perform DVD player operations, such as play and stop. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating your VCR Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and then press VCR to select VCR as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the VCR operation mode. ■ Operating your STB (CATV/Satellite tuner) Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and then press STB to select STB as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the STB operation mode. VCR TV/AV YSP STB TV/AV YSP POWER POWER STANDBY/ON AV TV STB VCR DVD INPUT1 POWER POWER STANDBY/ON 1 AV TV 1 AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO TV STB AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP VCR DVD INPUT1 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 1 2 3 7 8 9 STEREO 2 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 TV/AV +10 ENTER YSP MENU RETURN TEST VOLUME CH LEVEL CH TV/AV TV VOL ENTER YSP RETURN TEST 2 MUTE TV INPUT VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE TV MUTE CODE SET 3 3 ADVANCED OPERATION CODE SET 1 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your VCR. 2 CH +/– Switches between the available VCR channels. 3 Operation buttons for DVD and VCR Use to perform VCR operations, such as play and stop. 1 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your STB. 2 Numeric buttons Use to enter numeric digits. 3 CH +/– Switches between the available STB channels. English 79 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Setting macros for the TV with the tuning capability Using the TV macro The TV macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a DVD, you would normally turn on the component, select DVD as the input source and press the play button to start playback. The TV macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the DVD macro button. Notes 1 Press and hold CODE SET on the remote control and then press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE • Be sure to set up a remote control code for your TV before setting macros. • The ways to set macros differ if your TV does not have the tuning capability. • If you press any control buttons on the remote control other than the ones used to set macros while setting macros, the setting procedure is automatically canceled. • If it takes more than 10 seconds in steps 2 and 3, the setting procedure is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat from step 1. STB While holding down, press CODE SET 2 VCR AUX DVD TV Press MACRO on the remote control while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE While holding down, press MACRO CODE SET POWER POWER STANDBY/ON STB VCR INPUT1 AV TV DVD AUX 3 Press CH +/– or the numeric buttons to select the TV channel. Check that the TV screen changes to the tuner screen. TV INPUT2 MACRO TV CH AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO or MY BEAM SURROUND 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 3BEAM 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS OFF 7 8 9 0 +10 OFF 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU 4 TV/AV ENTER YSP Press TV INPUT on the remote control repeatedly so that the screen changes to the display of the input source selected in step 1. RETURN TEST TV INPUT VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE CODE SET 5 Press ENTER on the remote control to confirm the macro setting. ENTER 80 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Setting macros for the TV without the tuning capability ■ Operating macros 1 1 Press and hold CODE SET on the remote control and then press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE STB DVD AUX TV/AV YSP 2 While holding down, press TV CODE SET 2 VCR Set the operation mode selector to YSP to switch to the operation mode of this unit. Press and hold one of the input selector buttons for approximately 2 seconds to select the input source you want to operate macros for. The TV input changes at the same time the input mode changes. Press MACRO on the remote control while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE While holding down, press STB MACRO VCR AUX DVD TV CODE SET ■ Canceling the macros 3 Press INPUT1 on the remote control. 1 INPUT1 4 Press CH +/– or TV INPUT on the remote control repeatedly so that the screen changes to the display of the input source selected in step 1. Press and hold CODE SET on the remote control and then press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to cancel the macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE While holding down, press STB VCR DVD AUX TV CODE SET CH 2 Press MACRO on the remote control while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE While holding down, press MACRO ADVANCED OPERATION TV INPUT or CODE SET 5 Press ENTER on the remote control to confirm the setting. 3 Press ENTER on the remote control to cancel the macros. ENTER ENTER English 81 En TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power supply cable and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem Cause Remedy See page This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed, or enters the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. The power supply cable is not firmly connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the power supply cable firmly to the AC wall outlet. 21 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power supply cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or the input selector buttons. 37 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 39 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume level. 39 Signals this unit cannot reproduce (such as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz of sampling frequency) are being received from source component. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — Change the system settings of the source component. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume level. 39 No sound from the effect channels. You are playing back the source or program in the stereo mode or my beam mode. Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control to select a multichannel playback mode and then try to play back the source or program once more. 40 No sound from the center channel. The output level of the center channel is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center channel. 68 No sound from the surround channels. The output level of the surround channels is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround channels. 68 No sound from the subwoofer. BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET is set to FRONT. Select SWFR. 63 No sound. The sound suddenly goes off. The source does not contain low bass signals. 82 En TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Distorted or too little bass sound. CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set incorrectly. Set CROSS OVER correctly. One of the night listening modes is currently selected. Turn off the night listening modes. TruBass is currently turned on. Turn off TruBass. 54 The volume level of the subwoofer is too high. Turn down the volume level of the subwoofer. — The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular shaped room. — There is no wall in the path of the sound beam. Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in the path of the sound beam. — The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO. 71 The protection circuitry was in operation because a source with strong bass elements was played back. Turn down the volume level. 39 Select SWFR for BASS OUT. 63 Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for SUBWOOFER SET. 63 Too much bass sound. Surround sound effects are insubstantial. Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator does not light up in the front panel display.) There is noise interference when a subwoofer is not connected to this unit. Remedy See page Problem 63 52 CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set incorrectly. Set CROSS OVER correctly. 63 On-screen display does not appear. The OSD video pin cable is not connected properly. Connect the cable properly. 15 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power supply cable from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or high-frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — This unit does not output effect sounds properly. The original source includes surround effects. Disable surround effect settings on this unit. — My beam auto-adjust function does not work. The listening room is too noisy. Keep the listening room as quiet as possible. — Try manual adjustment. 48 The sound reflectivity of the listening room is too much. Set REFLECTING to HI ECHO. 64 The remote control may be operated outside of the remote control operation range. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 22 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Low frequency sounds are distorted. English 83 En TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work and/or function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 22 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 22 The external component you want to operate is not selected as the input source. Press INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the external component you want to operate. 37 The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly or try another code for the same manufacturer using the “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 77 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Use the remote control supplied with the external component. — The cursor buttons do not work during SET MENU operation. The operation mode selector was unwantedly set to TV/AV. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. — You cannot use the my beam autoadjust function. Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 22 You cannot operate external components with this unit’s remote control. 84 En GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ DTS Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode for movies. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Audio information ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround English 85 En INDEX INDEX A AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ......................................... 27 B Beam mode......................................................... 40, 46, 47 C Cable clamp .................................................................... 14 Cardboard microphone stand.......................................... 29 D Dolby Digital .................................................................. 42 Dolby Pro Logic ............................................................. 42 Dolby Pro Logic II.......................................................... 42 DTS ................................................................................ 42 DTS Neo: 6..................................................................... 42 Dynamic range................................................................ 64 F Front panel display ........................................................... 7 L LFE 0.1 channel.............................................................. 85 M MANUAL SETUP ......................................................... 57 MEMORY ................................................................ 34, 35 My beam......................................................................... 47 86 En O On-screen display (OSD)................................................ 24 Optimizer microphone .................................................... 28 P PCM ................................................................................ 85 Power supply cable ......................................................... 21 R Remote control...................................................... 9, 22, 23 Remote control code ....................................................... 77 S SET MENU .................................................................... 24 Sleep timer ...................................................................... 55 Sound field program ....................................................... 49 Surround mode................................................................ 40 T Test tone.......................................................................... 68 TruBass ........................................................................... 54 TV macro ........................................................................ 80 V Volume mode .................................................................. 52 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AMP SECTION • Maximum Output Power (EIAJ) ................................................. 2 W (1 kHz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 21 20 W (100 Hz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 2 SPEAKER SECTION Small dia. speakers ........ 4 cm cone magnetic shielding type × 21 Woofers ...........................10 cm cone magnetic shielding type × 2 GENERAL • Power Supply [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [General model] ................................... AC 110–120 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] .......................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Input Jacks AUDIO VCR, TV/STB (Analog) (1 V, 32 kΩ) ... 2 pairs (Analog) AUDIO TV/STB, AUX (Optical) ................................. 2 (Digital) AUDIO DVD (Coaxial) .................................................1 (Digital) • Power Consumption ................................................................. 30 W • Output Jacks SUBWOOFER OUT (1.5 V, less than 120 Hz) ...... 1 (Subwoofer) VIDEO OUT (1 Vp-p, 75 Ω) ............................................ 1 (OSD) • Weight .................................................................................... 9.0 kg • System Connector Jack OPTIMIZER MIC ....................................... 1 (Microphone input) • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 800 × 153 × 115 mm * Specifications are subject to change without notice. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 87 En LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES LISTE DES CODES DE COMMANDE LISTA DEI CODICI DI TELECOMANDO LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE MANDO A DISTANCIA TV ADMIRAL 292, 293, 216 AIWA 294, 276, 283, 284 AKAI 295, 296 ALBA 296 AOC 297 BELL & HOWELL 292 BESTAR 298 BLAUPUNKT 229, 222 BLUE SKY 298 BRANDT 223 BROC SONIC 297 BUSH 296 BYD:SIGN 201, 202 CLATRONIC 298 CRAIG 224 CROSLEX 225 CURTIS MATHIS 297, 226 DAEWOO 297, 298, 224, 227, 228 DAYTRON 239 DUAL 298 DWIN 293, 281 EMERSON 297, 224, 239, 232 FURGUSON 223, 265, 266 FIRST LINE 298 FISHER 295, 233 FRABA 298 FUJITSU 289 FUNAI 277, 278 GE 293, 297, 234, 235, 236 GOODMANS 296, 298, 223 GRUNDIG 229, 238, 249 HITACHI 297, 239, 242, 243, 285, 206 ICE 296 IRRADIO 296 ITT/NOKIA 244, 245 JC PENNY 293, 297, 234, 237 JVC 296, 246, 247, 286 KENDO 298 KTV 297, 239 LG/GOLDSTAR 297, 298, 239, 237 LOEWE 298, 248 LXI 293, 297, 225, 226, 233, 298 MAGNAVOX 297, 225, 239, 298 MARANTZ 298, 210 MATSUI 295 MEDION 203, 204, 298 MEMOREX 297, 216 MITSUBISHI 299, 297, 259, 287 NAD 226, 255 NEC 297, 252, 282 NOKIA 244, 245 NOKIA OCEANIC 245 NORDMENDE 265, 266 ONWA 296 PANASONIC 234, 235, 236, 253, 288, 211 i PHILCO PHILIPS PIONEER 297, 225, 239, 298 298, 225, 205 226, 235, 254, 255, 268 PORTLAND 297, 256 PROSCAN 293, 221 PROSCAN 231, 241, 251 PROTON 297, 250, 260, 270 QUASAR 234, 235 RADIO SHACK299, 293, 297 RCA 293, 297, 234, 256, 257, 258, 221 RUNCO 220, 230, 271 SABA 223, 269, 265, 266 SAMPO 281, 297, 280 SAMSUNG 297, 239, 248, 262, 275 SANYO 295, 233, 279, 272, 273, 274, 212 SCHNEIDER 296 SCOTT 297 SHARP 292, 239, 232, 213 SIEMENS 229 SIGNATURE 216 SIGNATURE 292 SONY 263, 214 SYLVANIA 297, 225, 298 SYNPHONIC 217, 218, 219 TELEFUNKUN 269, 264, 265, 266 THOMSON 223, 266 TOSHIBA 292, 226, 267, 215 VIDECH 297, 242 WARDS 297, 239, 232, 216 YAMAHA 299, 292, 242, 285, 287, 253, 206 ZENITH 216, 261, 271 DVD PLAYER AIWA 648, 649 APEX DIGITAL 652, 653, 654 BYD:SIGN 678, 679 DAEWOO 655 DENON 623, 624, 682 FUNAI 625 HARMAN/KARDON 656, 657 HITACHI 626 JVC 627 KENWOOD 628 KLH 658 LG/GOLDSTAR 645, 663, 664 MARANTZ 699, 659 MITSUBISHI 629 ONKYO 632, 633, 634 PANASONIC 623, 635, 668, 672, 682, 683, 684 PHILIPS 699, 647, 659 PIONEER 636, 637, 638, 673, 674, 675, 685 686, 687 RCA 639 SAMSUNG 642 SHARP 643 SONY SYLVANIA SYMPHONIC THOMSON TOSHIBA YAMAHA ZERITH 644, 676, 677 662 662 646 634, 665, 666, 667 699, 622, 623, 647, 682 663, 664 VCR ADMIRAL 395 AIWA 396, 397, 398, 329 AKAI 322, 323, 324 AUDIO DYNAMIC 392, 394 BELL & HOWELL 393 BLAUPUNKT 325, 326 BROC SONIC 327 BUSH 322 CANON 325, 328 CGM 396, 332 CITIZEN 396 CRAIG 396, 363 CURTHIS MATHIS 397, 328, 333 DAEWOO 328, 334, 335 DBX 392, 394 DIMENSIA 333 DYNATECH 397 EMERSON 327, 334, 396, 397 FISHER 393, 336 FUNAI 397 GE 328, 333, 387 GO VIDEO 321, 331, 341, 351, 353, 363 GOODMANS 334, 337 GRUNDIG 332, 338 HITACHI 325, 333, 349, 342, 343 INSTANT REPLAY 325, 328 ITT/NOKIA 393 JC PENNY 392, 393, 394, 328, 333, 349, 396, 363 JVC 392, 394, 344, 345, 346, 347 KENDO 396 KENWOOD 392, 394, 396 LG/GOLDSTAR 396, 388 LOEWE 396, 337 LUXOR 395 LXI 393, 396, 397, 336, 349 MAGNAVOX 325, 326, 328 MARANTZ 392, 394 MARTA 396 MATSUI 396 MEMOREX 328, 336, 396, 397 MINOLTA 333, 349 MITSUBISHI 399, 344, 348, 359, 353, 352 MTC 363, 397 MULTITECH 397, 348, 354 NEC 392, 394, 344, 383 NOKIA 393, 395 NOKIA OCEANIC 395 OKANO 323 OLYMPIC 325, 328 ORION 327 PANASONIC 325, 328, 339, 355, 378, 384, 385, 386 PENTAX 333, 349 PHILCO 325, 328, 397 PHILLIPS 325, 326, 328, 337, 356, 357 PHONOLA 337 PILOT 396 PIONEER 325 QUASAR 325, 328 RCA/PROSCAN 325, 326, 328, 333, 335, 349, 358, 363, 397 REALISTIC 393, 397, 328, 336, 359, 362, 396, 363 SAMSUNG 354, 358, 363, 364, 365, 366 SANSUI 394 SANYO 393, 336, 367 SCHNEIDER 337 SCOTT 399, 335, 336, 348, 359, 354, 358 SELECO 322 SHARP 395, 362, 382 SIEMENS 393 SIGNATURE 2000 395, 397 SONY 368, 379, 372, 373, 374, 375 SYLVANIA 397, 325, 326, 328 SYMPHONIC 397 TANDBERG 334 TANDY 397 TASHIRO 396 TATUNG 392, 394 TEAC 392, 394, 397 TECHNICS 325, 328 TEKNIKA 396 TELEFUNKUN 376, 377 THOMAS 397 THORN 393, 396 TOSHIBA 335, 389 TOTEVISION 363, 396 UNITECH 363 UNIVERSUM 396, 327, 376 VIDEOSONIC 363 W.WHOUSE 396 WARDS 395, 396, 336, 362, 397, 363 YAMAHA 399, 392, 393, 394 ZERITH 344, 361, 368, 371, 379, 396, 397 CABLE TV TUNER ABC 739, 752, 753, 755, 758, 759, 762 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 722 HAMIN 723, 724, 725, 726, 727 HITACHI 722 JEROLD 722, 728, 729, 732, 733, 734, 735, 736, 737 MAGNAVOX 738 MOTOROLA 748 OAK 739, 742, 743 PANASONIC 744, 745, 746, 747, 783, 784 PHILLIPS 763, 764, 765, 766, 767, 768 PIONEER 748, 785, 747 RADIO SHACK749 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 752, 753, 754 SONY 756, 757 TOCOM 755 UNIVERSAL 769, 772, 773, 774, 775 VIEWSTAR 764, 766, 776, 777, 778, 779, 782 SATELLITE TUNER ECHOSTAR 822 GE 837, 838, 839 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 823 HITACHI 824 HUGHES 843, 844, 845, 846 JVC 822 MAGNAVOX 825 PANASONIC 826, 829 PHILLIPS 825, 843, 844, 845, 846, 847, 848, 849 PRIMESTAR 827 PROSCAN 837, 838, 839, 842 RADIO SHACK 828 RCA 837, 838, 839, 842 SAMSUNG 852 SONY 832, 835 TOSHIBA 833, 836 UNIDEN 825 ZENITH 834 ii YSP-900_E-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 11, 2006 2:46 PM E YSP-900 © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WH83010 YSP-900 Digital Sound Projector Système Acoustique Numérique OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES English Connecting external components to this unit Connect external component such as a TV or DVD player to this unit. YSP-900 Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. Connecting a subwoofer enhances bass sound for listening enjoyment. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 14 to 20 in the Owner’s Manual. QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE Cables used for connections TV Connect cables in the following order. DVD player 1 2 3 4 5 6 This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Analog audio output Installing this unit Video input Optical digital output L 1 R 2 5 Video output Coaxial digital output Audio pin cable (supplied) Optical cable (supplied) OSD (On-Screen Display) video pin cable (supplied) Digital audio pin cable (supplied) DVD video pin cable Subwoofer pin cable (in case you connect a subwoofer) CAUTION ・Do not plug the power supply cable into a wall outlet until all connections are complete. ・Unplug the power supply cable before changing connections, moving or cleaning this unit. Decide where to install this unit. Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. An object, such as furniture 2 1 3 4 Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the adjacent walls. To the AC outlet This unit An object, such as furniture 6 40˚ to 50˚ VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER TV/STB VIDEO AUX OPTICAL AUDIO INPUT OUT DVD Monaural input COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT Subwoofer y If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then carry out the AUTO SETUP procedure (see the backside) or select “SWFR” for “BASS OUT” in “SUBWOOFER SET” (see page 63 in the Owner’s Manual). Setting up the listening environment automatically Connect the optimizer microphone to this unit. You can automatically adjust the various channel settings that best match your listening environment using the supplied optimizer microphone. Follow the procedure below to connect the optimizer microphone to this unit and place it in a proper location. Install this unit either above or under your TV. Connect the optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Cardboard microphone stand (supplied) Please read the following for reference. For further information on installation, see pages 11 to 13 in the Owner’s Manual. Make sure you use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit (see page 13 in the Owner’s Manual). Assemble the cardboard microphone stand and place the optimizer microphone on the top of the stand. OPTIMIZER MIC When installing this unit above your TV, place it on the top panel of a commercially available rack as shown below. Make sure that the top panel of the rack is wide and stable enough to support the weight of this unit. When installing this unit under your TV, place it in a TV cabinet as shown below. Make sure that the cabinet is large enough to allow adequate ventilation space around this unit. To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor. INPUT − VOLUME ＋ STANDBY/ON OPTIMIZER MIC Optimizer microphone (supplied) Set the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position. Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated. Place the optimizer microphone on the extended center line of this unit and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from it. Also, make sure place the optimizer microphone within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. Optimizer microphone Within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) Cardboard microphone stand Printed in Malaysia WH90310 Sofa Center line Optimizer microphone If you have set the optimizer microphone, follow the steps on the backside to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. C2006 Continued on the back All rights reserved. Continued from the front Carry out the AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) procedure to adjust the settings that best match your listening environment. Enjoying surround sound This unit employs the YAMAHA IntelliBeam technology with the aid of the supplied optimizer microphone, allowing you to achieve highly accurate sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. Enjoy TV or DVD audio in surround sound. 1 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control. STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV ・Is the optimizer microphone firmly connected to this unit? ・Is the optimizer microphone placed in a proper loacation? ・Are there any large obstacles in between the optimizer microphone and the walls in your listening room? ・The AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds after pressing ENTER on step 7. To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself for your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed. ・To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started, press RETURN. ・The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes. TV The power of this unit turns on. STB VCR DVD AUX TV If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover/high cut frequency controls is connected to this unit, set the volume between 10 and 12 o’clock as viewed on a conventional clockface and set the crossover/high cut frequency to the maximum. CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME MIN MAX MIN For instructions on your TV or DVD player, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component. Before carrying out the procedure below, set the volume of this unit to 30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in step 4. Check the following points. Enjoying TV in surround sound 1 Select the TV channel using the remote control supplied Enjoying DVDs in surround sound 1 Select the DVD video input on your TV. with your TV. MAX Subwoofer 2 2 Turn on the power of your TV. 7 CH LEVEL TV/AV Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. ENTER YSP CH LEVEL Select the appropriate video input on your TV. MENU AUTO SETUP START Will begin in 10sec TV/AV Please leave the room ENTER YSP RETURN TEST 3 **-------[RETURN]:Cancel Press TV on the remote control of this unit. This unit switches to the TV playback mode. 4 The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO SETUP procedure. If any error occurs, the corresponding error message appears on the screen. In this case, see “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 33 in the Owner’s Manual and then follow the instructions. To start the AUTO SETUP procedure once again, press RETURN and then carry out the procedure from step 5. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. CH LEVEL MENU RETURN TEST The following screen appears on the TV and the AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds. 3 MENU Set the operation mode selector to YSP . INPUT1 3 Press DVD on the remote control of this unit, and then start playback on the DVD player. This unit switches to the DVD playback mode. TV INPUT2 MACRO STB VCR TV INPUT1 AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP When the AUTO SETUP procedure is complete, the following screen appears on the TV. TV/AV ENTER YSP TEST RETURN SHOW RESULT MEASUREMENT COMPLETE BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER:NOT APPLICABLE * This is an example of the result screen. 4 The result may differ depending on the environment. If you hear sound output from your TV speakers, turn down the volume level until you cannot hear any sound. Use the remote control supplied with your TV. [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. 5 Press and hold AUTO SETUP for more than 2 seconds. The menu screen appears on the TV. If the menu screen does not appear, check the video pin cable (connection 3 in the diagram on the front page) is connected properly and then press YSP followed by MENU. STB VCR DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO INPUT1 TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the YSP unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel 5 8 VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 Press VOLUME +/– on the remote control to adjust the volume level of this unit. Press ENTER. The result is confirmed and the following screen appears on the TV for 2 seconds and then the menu screen disappears from the TV. The new settings are automatically saved in the system memory. Disconnect the optimizer microphone and keep it in a safe place. CH LEVEL MENU AUTO SETUP COMPLETE TV/AV ENTER YSP TEST Please remove the MIC from the YSP and the listening position. 6 Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control to select the desired beam mode. Select one of the three beam modes that best matches the current input source of this unit. For further information on the beam modes, see page 40 in the Owner’s Manual. STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 RETURN To fine-tune the listening environment parameters manually or make advanced settings for speaker positions, sound beams, etc., see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 57 in the Owner’s Manual. Français Connexion des appareils externes Connectez les appareils externes tels qu’un poste de télévision ou un lecteur de DVD a l’appareil. YSP-900 Pour la connexion, utilisez les câbles adaptés (voir ci-dessous). En connectant un caisson de graves, vous apprécierez mieux encore le rendu des graves. Pour de plus amples informations sur la connexion d’autres appareils, reportez-vous aux pages 14 à 20 du Mode d’emploi. GUIDE DE REFERENCE RAPIDE Câbles utilisés pour les raccordements TV Connectez les câbles en respectant l’ordre suivant. Lecteur de DVD 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ce guide de référence vous explique comment procéder pour connecter une télévision ou un lecteur de DVD à cet appreil afin d’obtenir rapidement le son surround que vous recherchez. Pour le détail des fonctions, veuillez vous reporter au Mode d’emploi. Analog audio output Installation de l’appareil Video input Optical digital output L 1 R 2 5 Video output Coaxial digital output Câble audio à broche (fourni) Câble à fibres optiques (fourni) Câble vidéo pour affichage sur l’écran (OSD) (fourni) Câble audionumerique à broche (fourni) Câble vidéo à broche Câble à fiches pour le caisson de graves (si vous en connectez un) ATTENTION Choisissez l’emplacement de l’appareil. Installez l’appareil à un endroit où des meubles ou d’autres objects ne risquent pas de faire obstacle aux faisceaux sonores émis. Sinon, vous n’obtiendrez pas les affects d’ambiance souhaités. Vous pouvez installer cet appareil parallèment à un mur ou dans un angle de la piece. Installez cet appareil au centre du mur dans le sens de la longueur. Un objet, par exemple un meuble 2 1 3 4 Installez cet appareil dans un angle du mur à 40˚ à 50˚ des murs adjacents. L’appareil A une prise secteur 6 TV/STB SUBWOOFER TV/STB VIDEO 40˚ à 50˚ AUX OPTICAL AUDIO INPUT OUT DVD Monaural input COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT y Si un caisson de graves est connecté à l’appareil, mettez votre caisson de graves sous tension et exécutez la procédure AUTO SETUP (voir au verso) ou sélectionnez “SWFR” pour “BASS OUT” dans “SUBWOOFER SET” (voir page 63 du Mode d’emploi). Un objet, par exemple un meuble VCR ・Ne branchez le cordon d’alimentation sur une prise secteur que lorsque tous les autres raccordements ont été effectués. ・Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation avant de changer les raccordements, de déplacer ou de nettoyer l’appareil. Caisson de graves Réglage automatique de l’ambiance d’écoute Connectez le microphone d’optimisation à l’appareil. Vous pouvez ajuster automatiquement les réglages des canaux avec le microphone d’optimisation fourni pour harmoniser au mieux votre ambiance d’écoute. Pour connecter le microphone d’optimisation à l’appareil et le placer au bon endroit, suivez la procédure suivante. Installez l’appareil au-dessus ou en dessous de votre poste de télévision. Raccordez le microphone d’optimisation à la prise OPTIMIZER MIC sur la face avant. Support de microphone plat (fourni) Veuillez lire attentivement ce qui suit. Pour de plus amples informations sur l’installation, reportez-vous aux pages 11 et 13 du Mode d’emploi. Veuillez à utiliser les fixations fournies pour éviter toute chute accidentelle de l’apprareil (voir page 13 du Mode d’emploi). Montez le support en carton et posez le microphone d’optimisation dessus. OPTIMIZER MIC INPUT Si vous installez l’appareil au-dessus de votre poste de télévision, placez-le sur la planche supérieure d’un meuble vendu dans le commerce (voir ci-dessous). Assurez-vous que la planche supérieure du meuble est suffisamment large et stable pour supporter le poids de l’appareil. Si vous installez l’appareil sous votre poste de télévision, placez-le dans un meubleTV comme ci-dessous. Assurez-vous que le meuble est assez grand pour garantir l’aération autour de l’appareil. Pour obtenir un meilleur son surround, placez l’appareil sur la dernière étagère, le plus loin possible du sol. − VOLUME ＋ STANDBY/ON OPTIMIZER MIC Microphone optimiseur (fourni) Réglez le microphone à votre niveau d’écoute normal. Utilisez le support de micro fourni ou un trépied ou placez le microphone à la même hauteur que vos oreilles lorsque vous êtes assis. Posez le microphone d’optimisation dans l’axe horizontal de cet appareil à au moins 1,8 m de l’appareil. Le microphone devrait être posé à moins de 1 m verticalement de l’axe de l’appareil. Microphone optimiseur À moins de 1 m verticalement de part et d’autre de l’axe de l’appareil Plus de 1,8 m Support de microphone plat Printed in Malaysia WJ02600 Fauteuil Axe Miccrophone optimiseur Une fois le microphone d’optimisation réglé, suivez les indications fournies au verso pour lancer la procédure AUTO SETUP. C2006 Suite au verso All rights reserved. Pour définir les réglages les mieux adaptés à votre ambiance d’écoute, lancez la procédure AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam). Suite du recto Utilisation du son d’ambiance Cet appareil qui bénéficie de la technologie intelliBeam de Yamaha avec microphone d’optimisation inclus, vous permet des réglages sonores d’une extrême précision, en parfaite harmonie avec votre ambiance d’écoute. Sachez qu’il est normal que les sons d’essai puissants soient restitués pendant la procédure AUTO SETUP. Faites en sorte qu’il n’y ait pas d’enfants dans la pièce pendant le déroulement de la procédure AUTO SETUP. Regardez la télévision ou un DVD audio en profitant du son surround. 1 6 Appuyez sur la touche STANDBY/ON de la télécommande. STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV ・Est-ce que le microphone optimiseur est bien raccordé à appareil? ・Est-ce que le microphone optimiseur est installé au bon endroit? ・Y a-t-il de gros obstacles entre le microphone optimiseur et les murs dans la pièce? ・La procédure AUTO SETUP commence 10 secondes après que vous ayez appuyé sur ENTER à l’étape 7. Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats possible, restez hors de la pièce pendant toute la procédure. ・Pour annuler la procédure AUTO SETUP lorsqu’elle a commencé, appuyez sur RETURN. ・La procédure AUTO SETUP dure environ 3 minutes. TV L’appareil s’allume. STB VCR DVD AUX TV Si le caisson de graves raccordé à cet appareil a des commandes de réglage du volume et de la fréquence de transition et de coupure des aigus, réglez le volume entre les positions 10 et 12 heures d’une montre et la fréquence de transition/ coupure des aigus au niveau maximal. CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME MIN MAX MIN MAX Pour les instructions sur votre poste de télévision ou lecteur de DVD, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi fourni avec chaque appareil. Avant de passer à la procédure ci-dessous, réglez le volume de l’appareil sur 30. S’ll le faut, réglez le volume à l’étape 4. Vérifiez les points suivants. Écoute de la télévision avec son d’ambiance Les DVD en son surround 1 1 Sélectionnez le canal TV á l’aide de la télécommande fournie avec le poste de télévision. 2 Réglez le sélecteur de mode de fonctionnement sur YSP. Sélectionnez l’entrée DVD vidéo sur votre poste de télévision. Subwoofer 2 Allumez votre poste de télévision. 7 Appuyez sur ENTER pour lancer la procédure CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST AUTO SETUP. 3 L’écran suivant apparaît sur l’ecran du téléviseur et la procédure AUTO SETUP commence 10 secondes plus tard. Sur votre poste de télévision, sélectionnez l’entrée vidéo qui convient. CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN TEST 4 Demarrage reglage automatique 3 Debut du reglage dans 10 sec. L’appareil passe en mode de lecture des DVD. **-------[RETURN]:Annulation INPUT1 L’écran de réglage change automatiquement pendant la procédure AUTO SETUP. En cas d’erreur, le message d’erreur correspondant apparaît sur l’écran. Si le cas se présente, reportez-vous à “Messages d’erreur pour AUTO SETUP” à la page 33 dans le Mode d’emploi et suivez les instructions pour résoudre le problème. Pour redémarrer la procédure AUTO SETUP, appuyez sur RETURN puis exécutez la procédure depuis l’étape 5. MENU Lorsque la procédure AUTO SETUP est terminée, l’écran suivant apparaît sur le poste de télévision. TV/AV ENTER YSP RETURN Mesures effectuees Mode faisceaux:5 Beam Subwoofer:Pas applicable [ENTER]:Enregistrer les reglages [RETURN]:Ne pas enregistrer les reglages Appuyez au moins 2 secondes sur AUTO SETUP. Le menu apparaît sur le poste de télévision. S’il n’apparaît pas, vérifiez si le câble vidéo à prise cinch (connexion 3 sur le schéma de la première page) est bien branché, et appuyez sur YSP puis sur MENU. STB VCR DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO INPUT1 TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 Instal. AUTO Preparation et controle SVP connectez le micro SVP installer le micro a plus de 1.8m de l' YSP Le micro doit etre installe au niveau du point d'ecoute Mesures Effect. en 3min. Apres appuyez sur ENTER SVP quittez la piece [ENTER]:Demar. [RETURN]:Reto y Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue indiquée dans les informations OSD en procédant de la façon suivante. Réglez le sélecteur de mode de fonctionnement sur YSP→ Appuyez sur MENU → Appuyez sur / pour sélectionner LANGUAGE SETUP → Appuyez sur ENTER → Appuyez sur / pour sélectionner la langue → Appuyez sur ENTER TV INPUT2 MACRO STB VCR DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 4 * Ceci est un exemple d’écran de Si vous entendez des sons sortir des haut-parleurs de votre télé, baissez le volume jusqu’à ce que vous n’entendiez plus rien. Utilisez le boîtier de télécommande fourni avec le téléviseur. résultats. Le résultat peut être différent selon l’environnement. 5 8 INPUT1 AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP Affichage resultat 5 Sur la télécommande de l’appareil, appuyez sur DVD, puis lancez le mode lecture sur le lecteur de DVD. TV fonctionnement sur YSP. TEST 3 L’appareil passes en mode de lecture TV. SVP sortez de la piece Réglez le sélecteur de mode de CH LEVEL Sur la télécommande de l’appareil, appuyez sur TV. VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 Pour régler le volume de l’appareil, appuyez sur la touche VOLUME +/- de la télécommande. Appuyez sur ENTER. Le résultat vous est confirmé et l’écran suivant apparaît sur le poste de télévision pendant 2 secondes, puis le menu disparaît. Les nouveaux réglages sont automatiquement sauvegardés dans la mémoire du système. Débranchez le microphone d’optimisation et rangez-le en lieu sûr. CH LEVEL MENU Installation Auto effectuee TV/AV ENTER YSP TEST RETURN SVP retirez le micro de l' YSP et de la position d'ecoute 6 Appuyez sur l’un des boutons de mode faisceau de la télécommande pour sélectionner le mode faisceau souhaité. Parmi les trois modes de faisceau sélectionnez celui qui correspond le mieux à la source sélectionnée sur cet appareil. Pour de plus amples informations sur les modes faisceau, reportez-vous à la page 40 du Mode d’emploi. STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 Pour régler manuellement les paramétres d’écoute ou effectuer des réglages sophistiqués pour l’emplacement des enceintes, les faisceaux sonores, etc., reportez-vous à “MANUAL SETUP” à la page 57 du Mode d’emploi. Español Conexión de los componentes externos a esta unidad Conexión de componentes externos como una TV o un reproductor DVD a esta unidad. YSP-900 Conecte su TV o reproductor DVD a la unidad utilizando los cables adecuados, tal como se muestra en el siguiente gráfico. Conectando un subwoofer se mejora el sonido de los bajos, para disfrutar más de la escucha. Para obtener más información sobre cómo conectar otros componentes, consulte las páginas 14 a 20 en el Manual de Instrucciones. GUÍA RÁPIDA DE REFERENCIA Cables utilizados para las conexiones Conectar los cables en el siguiente orden. TV 1 2 3 4 5 6 Reproductor de DVD La presente guía rápida de referencia explica los pasos a seguir para conectar una TV y un reproductor DVD a esta unidad y conseguir los efectos de sonido surround de forma rápida y sencilla. Para detalles sobre su funcionamiento, consultar el Manual de Instrucciones. Analog audio output Instalación de esta unidad Video input Optical digital output L 1 R 2 5 Video output Coaxial digital output Cable de audio con clavijas (suministrado) Cable óptico (suministrado) Cable de vídeo OSD con clavijas (suministrado) Cable de audio digital con clavijas (suministrado) Cable de vídeo con clavijas Cable de altavoz de subgraves (si conecta un subwoofer) PRECAUCIÓN Decidir dónde instalar la unidad. Instale esta unidad donde no haya obstáculos como, por ejemplo, muebles obstruyendo la trayectoria de los haces sonoros. De lo contrario no se obtendrán los efectos de sonido surround deseados. Puede Instalar esta unidad paralela a una pared o en una esquina. Instale esta unidad en el centro exacto de la pared según se mide desde las esquinas derecha e izquierda. Un objeto como, por ejemplo, un mueble 2 1 3 4 Instale esta unidad en una esquina a un ángulo de 40˚ a 50˚ de las paredes adyacentes. Esta unidad A la toma de CA Un objeto como, por ejemplo, un mueble 6 VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER TV/STB VIDEO 40˚ a 50˚ AUX OPTICAL AUDIO INPUT OUT DVD Monaural input COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT Altavoz de subgraves ・No enchufe el cable de alimentación en una toma de corriente hasta después de finalizar todas las conexiones. ・Desenchufe el cable de alimentación antes de cambiar conexiones, mover este aparato o limpiarlo. y Si se conecta un subwoofer a esta unidad, encender el subwoofer y a continuación efectuar el procedimiento AJUSTE AUTOMÁTICO (ver reverso) o seleccionar “SWFR” para “BASS OUT” en “SUBWOOFER SET” (ver página 63 en el Manual de Instrucciones). Ajuste automático del entorno de escucha Conectar el micrófono optimizador a esta unidad. Puede ajustar automáticamente las distintas selecciones de canales que mejor se ajusten a su entorno de escucha, utilizando el micrófono optimizador incluido. Siga el siguiente procedimiento para conectar el micrófono optimizador a esta unidad, y colóquelo en el lugar adecuado. Instalar la unidad encima o debajo de su TV. Conecte el micrófono optimizador a la toma OPTIMIZER MIC del lado izquierdo de esta unidad. Sírvase leer la siguiente información de referencia. Para más información sobre la instalación, ver las páginas 11 y 13 del Manual de Instrucciones. Asegúrese de utilizer los elementos de fijación incluidos, para evitar que la unidad pueda caerse accidentalmente (ver página 13 del Manual de Instrucciones). Soporte de cartón para micrófono (suministrado) Monte el soporte de cartón y coloque encima el micrófono optimizador. OPTIMIZER MIC INPUT Si instala la unidad encima de su TV, colóquela en el panel superior de una estantería, disponible en los comercios, tal como se ilustra más abajo. Asegúrese de que el panel superior de la estantería sea lo bastante ancho y estable como para aguantar el peso de la unidad. Si instala la unidad debajo de su TV, sitúela en un mueble para TV, tal como se ilustra más abajo. Asegúrese de que el mueble sea lo bastante ancho para permitir una ventilación adecuada alrededor de la unidad. Para disfrutar mejor de los efectos surround, coloque la unidad en la estantería superior, lo más lejos posible del suelo. − VOLUME ＋ STANDBY/ON OPTIMIZER MIC Micrófono optimizador (suministrado) Sitúe el micrófono optimizador en su posición habitual de escucha. Utilice el soporte de cartón incluido o un trípode para colocar el micrófono optimizador a la misma altura en que estarían sus oídos cuando está sentado. Ponga el micrófono optimizador sobre la línea central extendida de esta unidad y a 1,8 m o más alejado de ella. Además, asegúrese de colocar el micrófono optimizador dentro de 1 m por encima o por debajo de la altura central de esta unidad. Micrófono optimizador Dentro de 1 m por encima o por debajo del centro A más de 1,8 m Soporte de cartón para micrófono Printed in Malaysia WJ02590 Sofá Línea central Micrófono optimizador Una vez programado el micrófono optimizador, siga los pasos que figuran en el reverso, para iniciar el procedimiento de AJUSTE AUTOMÁTICO. C2006 Continúa en el reverso All rights reserved. Continúa de la otra cara Efectúe el procedimiento de AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) para seleccionar los ajustes que mejor correspondan a su entorno de escucha. Disfrute del sonido surround Esta unidad emplea la tecnología IntelliBeam de YAMAHA que, con ayuda del micrófono optimizador incluido, le permite seleccionar con gran precisión los ajustes de sonido que mejor correspondan a su entorno de escucha. Téngase en cuenta que es normal que se emitan tonalidades bastante fuertes de prueba, durante el procedimiento de AUTO SETUP. Asegúrense de que no hay niños pequeños en la habitación mientras se efectúa el procedimiento de AJUSTE AUTOMÁTICO. Disfrute de la TV o de un DVD audio con sonido surround. 1 6 Presione STANDBY/ON en el mando a distancia. STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV ・¿Está el micrófono optimizador firmemente conectado a esta unidad? ・¿Está el micrófono optimizador colocado en un lugar adecuado? ・¿Hay abstáculos grandes entre el micrófono optimizador y las paredes de su habitación de escucha? ・El procedimiento AUTO SETUP empieza 10 segundos después de pulsar ENTER en el paso 7. Para obtener los mejores resultados posibles, salga de su sala de escucha hasta que termine el procedimiento AUTO SETUP. ・Para cancelar el procedimiento AUTO SETUP después de haber empezado, pulse RETURN. ・El procedimiento AUTO SETUP tarda unos 3 minutos. TV La unidad se encenderá. STB VCR DVD AUX TV Si se conecta a esta unidad un altavoz de subgraves con controles de volumen ajustable y control de frecuencia de cruce/ frecuencia de corte alta, ajuste el volumen entre las 10 y las 12 en punto según se mira un reloj convencional y ajuste la frecuencia de cruce/frecuencia de corte alta al máximo. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN MAX Si necesita instrucciones sobre su TV o reproductor DVD, consulte el manual de instrucciones suministrado con cada componente. Antes de efectuar el siguiente procedimiento, ajuste el volumen de la unidad en 30. Si fuese necesario, ajuste el nivel de volumen tal como se describe en el paso 4. Compruebe los siguientes puntos. Para disfrutar de la TV con sonido surround Disfrutar de DVD con sonido surround 1 1 Seleccione el canal de TV utilizando el mando a distancia de su TV. 2 Ponga el selector de modo de funcionamiento en YSP. Seleccione la entrada de vídeo DVD en su TV. Altavoz de subgraves 2 3 Encienda su TV. 7 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV Pulse ENTER para empezar el procedimiento AUTO SETUP. ENTER YSP RETURN TEST La pantalla siguiente aparece en su TV y el procedimiento AUTO SETUP empieza en 10 segundos. Seleccione la entrada vídeo apropiada en su CH LEVEL TV. MENU COMIENZO CONFIG. AUTOMATICA COMENZAR TV/AV ENTER 3 EN 10 S. Por favor salga de la sala La unidad pasa a modo de reproducción de TV. YSP RETURN TEST Presione TV en el mando a distancia de esta unidad. **-------[RETURN]:Cancelar 3 Presione DVD en el mando a distancia de esta unidad, y a continuación inicie la reproducción en el reproductor DVD. La unidad pasa al modo de reproducción DVD. 4 Ponga el selector del modo de operación en YSP. CH LEVEL INPUT1 La pantalla de configuración cambia automáticamente durante el procedimiento AUTO SETUP. Si se produce un error, en mensaje de error correspondiente aparece en la pantalla. En este caso, consulte “Mensaje de error para AUTO SETUP” en la página 33 del manual del propietario y luego siga las instrucciones. Para iniciar de nuevo el procedimiento AUTO SETUP, pulse RETURN y luego realice el procedimiento desde el paso 5. MENU TV/AV TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP STB VCR INPUT1 DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP ENTER YSP TEST Cuando termine el procedimiento AUTO SETUP aparecerá la pantalla siguiente en el televisor. RETURN MOSTRAR RESULTADO MEDIDA COMPLETA MODO BEAM:5 BEAM SUBWOOFER:NO APLICABLE 5 [ENTER]:Almacenar config. [RETURN]:No almacenar config. Mantenga pulsado AUTO SETUP durante más * Éste es un ejemplo de la pantalla del resultado. El resultado puede cambiar dependiendo del medio ambiente. STB VCR DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO INPUT1 TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 CONFIG. AUTOMATICA PREPARACION Y COMPROBACION Por favor conectar MIC Posicionar MIC por lo menos a 1.8m/6ft del YSP El MIC debe posicionarse a la altura del oido sentado Medidas duraran aprox. 3min Pulse [ENTER] y salga de sala [ENTER]:Comenzar [RETURN]:Cancelar 8 VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 Presione VOLUME +/– en el mando a distancia para ajustar el volumen de esta unidad. Pulse ENTER. El resultado se confirma y la pantalla siguiente aparece en el televisor durante 2 segundos, y luego, la pantalla del menú desaparece de la pantalla del televisor. Los nuevos ajustes se guardan automáticamente en la memoria del sistema. Desconecte el micrófono optimizador y guárdelo en un lugar seguro. CH LEVEL MENU CONFIG. AUTOMATICA COMPLETA y Puede seleccionar el idioma mostrado en la OSD ejecutando los pasos de abajo. Ponga el selector del modo de operación en YSP→ Pulse MENU → Pulse / para seleccionar LANGUAGE SETUP → Pulse ENTER → Pulse / para seleccionar el idioma → Pulse ENTER Si le llega algún sonido de los altovoces de la TV, baje el nivel de volumen hasta que deje de oírlo. Utilice para ello el mando a distancia de su TV. 5 de 2 segundos. La pantalla del menú aparece en el televisor. Si no aparece la pantalla del menú, compruebe que el cable con clavijas de vídeo (conexión 3 en el diagrama de la página frontal) esté conectado correctamente y pulse YSP seguido de MENU. 4 TV/AV ENTER YSP TEST Por favor quitar MIC del YSP 6 Presione uno de los botones de los haces de sonido en el mando a distancia para seleccionar el modo elegido. Seleccione uno de los tres modos de haces que mejor se adapten a la fuente de entrada actual de esta unidad. Para más información sobre los modos de haces de sonido, consultar la página 40 del Manual de Instrucciones. STEREO MY BEAM SURROUND 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 RETURN Para un ajuste manual de los parámetros del entorno de escucha, o para realizar ajustes avanzados de la colocación de altavoces, haces de sonido, etc., consulte “MANUAL SETUP” en la página 57 del Manual de Instrucciones.